REF615 Application Manual

—
RELION® 615 SERIES
Feeder Protection and Control REF615

Application Manual
Document ID: 1MRS756378
Issued: 2021-11-10
Revision: U
Product version: 5.0 FP1
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from
ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized
purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used,
copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
www.abb.com/relion
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons responsible
for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each intended
application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational
requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or
product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to
exclude or mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and information via a network
interface which should be connected to a secure network. It is the sole responsibility of the person
or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and
to take the necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application of
authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.) to protect the
product and the network, its system and interface included, against any kind of security breaches,
unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not
liable for any such damages and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out. In
case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than
under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or
damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with following directive and regulations.
Directives of the European parliament and of the council:

• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Directive 2014/30/EU
• Low-voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
UK legislations:
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
• Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
• The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Regulations 2012
These conformities are the result of tests conducted by the third-party testing in accordance with
the product standard EN / BS EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive / regulation, and with the product
standards EN / BS EN 60255-1 and EN / BS EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive / safety regulation.
The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Contents
Contents
1 Introduction............................................................................................. 10
1.1 This manual.............................................................................................................................................10
1.2 Intended audience.................................................................................................................................10
1.3 Product documentation....................................................................................................................... 11
1.3.1 Product documentation set.................................................................................................11
1.3.2 Document revision history...................................................................................................12
1.3.3 Related documentation........................................................................................................12
1.4 Symbols and conventions.................................................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 Symbols................................................................................................................................... 13
1.4.2 Document conventions........................................................................................................ 13
1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols........................................................................................... 15
2 REF615 overview......................................................................................19
2.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................19
2.1.1 Product version history........................................................................................................ 19
2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version............................................................21
2.2 Operation functionality........................................................................................................................22
2.2.1 Optional functions................................................................................................................ 22
2.3 Physical hardware..................................................................................................................................22
2.4 Local HMI.................................................................................................................................................24
2.4.1 Display..................................................................................................................................... 25
2.4.2 LEDs......................................................................................................................................... 26
2.4.3 Keypad.....................................................................................................................................26
2.5 Web HMI.................................................................................................................................................. 27
2.6 Authorization ........................................................................................................................................ 28
2.6.1 Audit trail................................................................................................................................ 29
2.7 Communication .....................................................................................................................................31
2.7.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring....................................................................................................32
2.7.2 Ethernet redundancy............................................................................................................ 33
2.7.3 Process bus............................................................................................................................ 35
2.7.4 Secure communication.........................................................................................................37
3 REF615 standard configurations...........................................................38

3.1 Standard configurations..................................................................................................................... 38
3.1.1 Supported functions in REF615 .........................................................................................39
3.1.2 Addition of control functions for primary devices and the use of binary inputs
and outputs...................................................................................................................... 43
3.2 Connection diagrams...........................................................................................................................43
REF615 7
Application Manual
Contents
3.3 Standard configuration A.................................................................................................................... 51

3.3.1 Applications............................................................................................................................51
3.3.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 52
3.3.3 Functional diagrams.............................................................................................................55
3.4 Standard configuration B.....................................................................................................................71
3.4.1 Applications............................................................................................................................ 71
3.4.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 72
3.4.3 Functional diagrams.............................................................................................................76
3.5 Standard configuration C....................................................................................................................95
3.5.1 Applications........................................................................................................................... 95
3.5.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 96
3.5.3 Functional diagrams............................................................................................................ 99
3.6 Standard configuration D...................................................................................................................111
3.6.1 Applications.......................................................................................................................... 111
3.6.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................112
3.6.3 Functional diagrams........................................................................................................... 115
3.7 Standard configuration E...................................................................................................................132
3.7.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................132
3.7.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................133
3.8 Standard configuration F...................................................................................................................157
3.8.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................157
3.8.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 158
3.8.3 Functional diagrams...........................................................................................................162
3.9 Standard configuration G..................................................................................................................185
3.9.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................185
3.9.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 186
3.10 Standard configuration H.................................................................................................................. 213
3.10.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................213
3.10.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 214
3.11 Standard configuration J...................................................................................................................242
3.11.1 Applications......................................................................................................................... 242
3.11.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 243
3.12 Standard configuration K.................................................................................................................. 272
3.12.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................272
3.12.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 273
3.13 Standard configuration L.................................................................................................................. 301
3.13.1 Applications......................................................................................................................... 301
3.13.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 302
3.13.3 Functional diagrams.......................................................................................................... 306
8 REF615
Application Manual
Contents
3.14 Standard configuration N.................................................................................................................. 331

3.14.1 Applications..........................................................................................................................331
3.14.2 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 332
4 Requirements for measurement transformers................................. 354

4.1 Current transformers.........................................................................................................................354
4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection................................354
5 Protection relay's physical connections.............................................358

5.1 Inputs.................................................................................................................................................... 358
5.1.1 Energizing inputs................................................................................................................ 358
5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input.......................................................................................... 359
5.1.3 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................360
5.1.4 Optional light sensor inputs............................................................................................. 362
5.1.5 RTD/mA inputs....................................................................................................................362
5.2 Outputs................................................................................................................................................. 363
5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling ............................................................................. 363
5.2.2 Outputs for signalling........................................................................................................364
5.2.3 IRF.......................................................................................................................................... 365
6 Glossary..................................................................................................366
REF615 9
Application Manual
Introduction 1MRS756378 U
1 Introduction
1.1 This manual

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines
sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when
calculating settings.
1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for
planning, pre-engineering and engineering.
The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power
engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes
and principles.
10 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set
Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle
Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from

the ABB Web site www.abb.com/relion.
REF615 11
Application Manual
1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date Product version History
A/2007-12-20 1.0 First release
B/2008-02-08 1.0 Content updated
C/2008-07-02 1.1 Content updated to corre-
spond to the product version
D/2009-03-04 2.0 Content updated to corre-
E/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated
F/2010-06-11 3.0 Content updated to corre-
G/2010-06-29 3.0 Terminology updated
H/2010-09-24 3.0 Content updated
K/2012-05-11 4.0 Content updated to corre-
L/2013-02-21 4.0 FP1 Content updated to corre-
M/2013-12-20 5.0 Content updated to corre-
N/2014-01-24 5.0 Content updated
P/2014-04-10 5.0 Content updated
R/2015-10-30 5.0 FP1 Content updated to corre-
S/2016-05-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated
T/2018-12-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated
U/2021-11-10 5.0 FP1 Content updated
Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site http://
www.abb.com/relion.
1.3.3 Related documentation

Name of the document Document ID
Modbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756468
DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756709
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol 1MRS756710
Manual
IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS756475
Engineering Manual 1MRS757121
Installation Manual 1MRS756375
Operation Manual 1MRS756708
Table continues on the next page
12 REF615
Application Manual
Name of the document Document ID

Technical Manual 1MRS756887
Cyber Security Deployment Guideline 1MRS758280
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which
could result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push-button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push-button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .

• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu > Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .

• Parameter names are shown in italics.
REF615 13
Application Manual
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
• IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier
font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
• This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".
14 REF615
Application Manual
1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

Table 1: Functions included in the relay
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Protection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)
protection, low stage
PHLPTOC2 3I> (2) 51P-1 (2)
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)
protection, high stage
PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)
protection, instantaneous stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)
protection, low stage
DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67-2 (1)
protection, high stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)
low stage
EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)
Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
high stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFIPTOC1 Io>>> (1) 50N/51N (1)
instantaneous stage
Directional earth-fault protection, low DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)
stage
DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)
Directional earth-fault protection, high DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67N-2 (1)
stage
Admittance-based earth-fault protec- EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)
tion
EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)
EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protec- WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)
tion
WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)
WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)
Transient/intermittent earth-fault pro- INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF (1)
tection
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA (1) 51NHA (1)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth- EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
fault protection, using calculated Io
Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)
tion
NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> (1) 46PD (1)
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)
ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)
ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)
PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)
PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)
PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)
PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)
Positive-sequence undervoltage protec- PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)
tion
PSPTUV2 U1< (2) 47U+ (2)
Negative-sequence overvoltage protec- NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)
tion
NSPTOV2 U2> (2) 47O- (2)
Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)
REF615 15
Application Manual

FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)
Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F (1)
feeders, cables and distribution trans-
formers
High-impedance based restricted earth- HREFPDIF1 dIoHi> (1) 87NH (1)
fault protection
High-impedance differential protection HIAPDIF1 dHi_A>(1) 87A(1)
for phase A
High-impedance differential protection HIBPDIF1 dHi_B>(1) 87B(1)
for phase B
High-impedance differential protection HICPDIF1 dHi_C>(1) 87C(1)
for phase C
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 51BF/51NBF (1)
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> (1) 68 (1)
Switch onto fault CBPSOF1 SOTF (1) SOTF (1)
Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)
TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)
Arc protection ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)
ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)
ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP (1)
MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP (2)
Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC (1) 21FL (1)
High-impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF (1) HIZ (1)
Reverse power/directional overpower DOPPDPR1 P>/Q> (1) 32R/32O (1)
protection
DOPPDPR2 P>/Q> (2) 32R/32O (2)
Multifrequency admittance-based earth- MFADPSDE1 Io> ->Y (1) 67YN (1)
fault protection
Interconnection functions
Directional reactive power undervoltage DQPTUV1 Q> ->,3U< (1) 32Q,27 (1)
protection
16 REF615
Application Manual

Low-voltage ride-through protection LVRTPTUV1 U<RT (1) 27RT (1)
LVRTPTUV2 U<RT (2) 27RT (2)
LVRTPTUV3 U<RT (3) 27RT (3)
Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM1 VS (1) 78V (1)
Power quality
Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQM3I (1)
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQM3V (1)
Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQMV (1)
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB (1) PQVUB (1)
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB (1) I <-> O CB (1)
Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)
DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)
Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC (1) I <-> O ESC (1)
Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)
DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)
DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)
ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)
Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 (1)
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 (1)
Condition monitoring and supervision
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM (1) CBCM (1)
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)
TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I (1) MCS 3I (1)
Current transformer supervision for HZCCASPVC1 MCS I_A(1) MCS I_A(1)
high-impedance protection scheme for
phase A
Current transformer supervision for HZCCBSPVC1 MCS I_B(1) MCS I_B(1)
phase B
Current transformer supervision for HZCCCSPVC1 MCS I_C(1) MCS I_C(1)
phase C
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 FUSEF (1) 60 (1)
Runtime counter for machines and devi- MDSOPT1 OPTS (1) OPTM (1)
ces
Measurement
Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR (1) DFR (1)
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LOADPROF (1)
Fault record FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC (1) FAULTREC (1)
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU1 3I (1) 3I (1)
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 (1)
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 Io (1) In (1)
RESCMMXU2 Io (2) In (2)
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U (1) 3V (1)
VMMXU2 3U (2) 3V (2)
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo (1) Vn (1)
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 (1)
Three-phase power and energy meas- PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E (1)
urement
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1)
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f (1) f (1)
REF615 17
Application Manual

IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value receiv- SMVRCV SMVRCV SMVRCV
ing (voltage sharing)
Other
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC1 TP (1) TP (1)
TPGAPC2 TP (2) TP (2)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, second res- TPSGAPC1 TPS (1) TPS (1)
olution)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minute res- TPMGAPC1 TPM (1) TPM (1)
olution)
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC1 PT (1) PT (1)
PTGAPC2 PT (2) PT (2)
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF (1)
TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) TOF (2)
Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) TON (1)
TONGAPC2 TON (2) TON (2)
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC1 SR (1) SR (1)
SRGAPC2 SR (2) SR (2)
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC1 MV (1) MV (1)
MVGAPC2 MV (2) MV (2)
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC1 SPC (1) SPC (1)
SPCGAPC2 SPC (2) SPC (2)
Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4 (1)
SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2) SCA4 (2)
Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4 (1)
18 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U REF615 overview
2 REF615 overview
2.1 Overview
REF615 is a dedicated feeder protection and control relay designed for the
protection, control, measurement and supervision of utility substations and
industrial power systems including radial, looped and meshed distribution
networks with or without distributed power generation. REF615 is a member
®
of ABB’s Relion product family and part of its 615 protection and control
product series. The 615 series relays are characterized by their compactness and
withdrawable-unit design.
Re-engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been designed to unleash
the full potential of the IEC 61850 standard for communication and interoperability
between substation automation devices.
The relay provides main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders in
distribution networks. The relay is also used as back-up protection in applications,
where an independent and redundant protection system is required.
Depending on the chosen standard configuration, the relay is adapted for the
protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolated neutral, resistance
earthed, compensated and solidly earthed networks. Once the standard
configuration relay has been given the application-specific settings, it can directly
be put into service.
The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including
IEC 61850 with Edition 2 support, process bus according to IEC 61850-9-2 LE,
®
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is
supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.
2.1.1 Product version history

Product version Product history
1.0 Product released
1.1 • IRIG-B
• Support for parallel protocols added: IEC 61850 and Modbus
• X130 BIO added: optional for variants B and D
• CB interlocking functionality enhanced
• TCS functionality in HW enhanced
• Non-volatile memory added
REF615 19
Application Manual
REF615 overview 1MRS756378 U

2.0 • Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP
• Support for IEC 60870-5-103
• Voltage measurement and protection
• Power and energy measurement
• New standard configurations E and F
• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI
• Fuse failure supervision
3.0 • New configurations G and H

• Additions to configurations A, B, E and F
• Application configurability support
• Analog GOOSE support
• Large display with single line diagram
• Enhanced mechanical design
• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
• Admittance-based earth-fault protection
• Frequency measurement and protection
• Synchronism and energizing check
• Combi sensor inputs
• Multi-port Ethernet option
4.0 • New configuration J

• Additions/changes for configurations A-H
• Dual fiber optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)
• Generic control point ( SPCGGIO) function blocks
• Additional logic blocks
• Button object for SLD
• Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD
• Wattmetric based E/F
• Harmonics based E/F
• Power Quality functions
• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
4.0 FP1 • High-availability seamless redundancy ( HSR) protocol

• Parallel redundancy protocol ( PRP-1)
• Parallel use of IEC 61850 and DNP3 protocols
• Parallel use of IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols
• Two selectable indication colors for LEDs (red or green)
• Online binary signal monitoring with PCM600
20 REF615
Application Manual

5.0 • New configurations K, L and N
• New layout in Application Configuration tool for all configurations
• Support for IEC 61850-9-2 LE
• IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization
• Fault locator
• Load profile recorder
• High-speed binary outputs
• Optional RTD inputs
• Profibus adapter support
• Support for multiple SLD pages
• Import/export of settings via WHMI
• Setting usability improvements
• HMI event filtering tool
5.0 FP1 • IEC 61850 Edition 2

• Currents sending support with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
• Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
• Support for configuration migration (starting from Ver.3.0 to Ver.5.0
FP1)
• Software closable Ethernet ports
• Chinese language support
• Report summary via WHMI
• Multifrequency admittance-based E/F
• Support for high-impedance differential protection
• Voltage unbalance power quality option
• Interconnection protection option
• Reverse power/directional overpower
• Switch onto fault
• Additional timer, set-reset and analog value scaling functions
2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version

• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.6 (Rollup 20150626) or later
• REF615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
- Parameter Setting
- Signal Monitoring
- Event Viewer
- Disturbance Handling
- Application Configuration
- Signal Matrix
- Graphical Display Editor
- Communication Management
- IED User Management
- IED Compare
- Firmware Update
- Fault Record tool
- Load Record Profile
- Lifecycle Traceability
- Configuration Wizard
REF615 21
Application Manual
- AR Sequence Visualizer
- Label Printing
- IEC 61850 Configuration
- IED Configuration Migration
Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site www.abb.com/
substationautomation or directly with Update Manager in PCM600.
2.2 Operation functionality
2.2.1 Optional functions

• Arc protection
• Autoreclosing
• Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ ASCII
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP3 TCP/IP or serial
• Admittance-based earth-fault protectiont (configurations A, B, E, F, G, J, L and N
only)
• Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection (configurations A, B, E, F, G, J, L and N
only)
• Harmonics-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D, F, J, L and N only)
• Interconnection protection (configurations L and N only)
• Power quality functions (configurations J, K, L and N only)
• Fault locator (configurations K, L and N only)
• RTD/mA measurement (configurations B, D, E, F, H, J and N only)
• IEC 61850-9-2 LE (configurations E, F, G, H, J, K, L and N only)
• IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization
2.3 Physical hardware

The protection relay consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The content
depends on the ordered functionality.
Table 2: Plug-in unit and case
Main unit Slot ID Content options
Plug-in unit - HMI Small (5 lines, 20 characters)

Large (10 lines, 20 characters) with SLD
Small Chinese (3 lines, 8 or more characters)

Large Chinese (7 lines, 8 or more characters) with SLD
22 REF615
Application Manual

X100 Auxiliary power/ BO mod- 48...250 V DC/100...240 V AC; or 24...60 V DC
ule
2 normally-open PO contacts
1 change-over SO contacts
1 normally-open SO contact
2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS
1 dedicated internal fault output contact
X110 BIO module Only with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L and N:
8 binary inputs
4 SO contacts
Only with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L and N:

8 binary inputs
3 HSO contacts
X120 AI/BI module Only with configurations A and B:
3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)
1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)
1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)
3 binary inputs
Only with configurations C, D, E, F, H, J and N:

1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A) 1
4 binary inputs
Only with configuration K:

1 residual current input (1/5 A)
Case X130 AI/ BI module Only with configurations E, F, H, J, K and N:

3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)
4 binary inputs
Additionally with configurations H, J, K and N:

1 reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 (60...210 V)
AI/ RTD/mA module Only with configurations E, F, H, J and N:

3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)
1 generic mA input
2 RTD sensor inputs
Additionally with configurations H, J and N:

1 reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 (60...210 V)
Sensor input module Only with configurations G and L:

3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current and voltage)
1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)
1 The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and
featuring core-balance current transformers.
REF615 23
Application Manual
Optional BIO module Optional for configurations B and D:

6 binary inputs
3 SO contacts
Optional RTD/mA module Optional for configurations B and D:

2 generic mA inputs
6 RTD sensor inputs
X000 Optional communication See the technical manual for details about different types of commu-
module nication modules.
Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of the
protection relay. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16…176
V DC by adjusting the binary input setting parameters.
The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this
manual.
See the installation manual for more information about the case and the
plug-in unit.
Table 3: Input/output overview
Std. conf. Ordercode digit Analog channels Binary channels

5–6 7–8 CT VT Combi BI BO RTD mA
sensor
A AA / AB AA 4 1 – 3 4 PO + 2 SO – –
B AA / AB AE 4 1 – 17 4 PO + 9 SO – –
FA 4 1 – 17 4 PO + 5 SO + 3 HSO – –
FA / FB AC 4 1 – 11 4 PO + 6 SO 6 2
FG 4 1 – 11 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO
C AC / AD AB 4 – – 4 4 PO + 2 SO – –
D AC / AD AF 4 – – 18 4 PO + 9 SO – –
FB 4 – – 18 4 PO + 5 SO + 3 HSO – –
FC / FD AD 4 – – 12 4 PO + 6 SO 6 2
FE 4 – – 12 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO
EFHJN AE / AF AG 4 5 – 16 4 PO + 6 SO – –
FC 4 5 – 16 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO – –
FE / FF AG 4 5 – 12 4 PO + 6 SO 2 1
FC 4 5 – 12 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO 2 1
GL DA / DB AH 1 – 3 8 4 PO + 6 SO – –
FD 1 – 3 8 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO – –
K BC AD 5 5 – 12 4 PO + 6 SO – –
FE 5 5 – 12 4 PO + 2 SO + 3 HSO – –
2.4 Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The
LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
24 REF615
Application Manual
REF615
Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.
Figure 2: Example of the LHMI
2.4.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and
rows fitting the view depends on the character size.
Table 4: Small display
Character size1 Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 5 20
Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 3 8 or more
1 Depending on the selected language
REF615 25
Application Manual
Table 5: Large display
Character size1 Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 10 20
Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 7 8 or more
The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2
3 4
1 Header 3 Content
2 Icon 4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)
Figure 3: Display layout
2.4.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,
WHMI or PCM600.
2.4.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands
to objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or
a disconnector. The push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
26 REF615
Application Manual
Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons
and RJ-45 communication port
2.5 Web HMI

The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser. When
the Secure Communication parameter in the protection relay is activated, the
Web server is forced to take a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS
encryption. The WHMI is verified with Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 and 11.0.
WHMI is disabled by default.
WHMI offers several functions.

• Programmable LEDs and event lists
• System supervision
• Parameter settings
• Measurement display
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
• Load profile record
• Phasor diagram
• Single-line diagram
• Importing/Exporting parameters
• Report summary
The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.
REF615 27
Application Manual
Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI
The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

• Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front
communication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.
2.6 Authorization
Four user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.
The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can be
changed with Administrator user rights.
User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI always uses
authorization.
28 REF615
Application Manual
Table 6: Predefined user categories
Username User rights

VIEWER Read only access
OPERATOR •
Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)
• Changing setting groups
• Controlling
• Clearing indications
ENGINEER • Changing settings

• Clearing event list
• Clearing disturbance records
• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud
rate or disturbance recorder settings
• Setting the protection relay to test mode
• Selecting language
ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above

• Changing password
• Factory default activation
For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.
2.6.1 Audit trail

The protection relay offers a large set of event-logging functions. Critical system
and protection relay security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile
audit trail for the administrator.
Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the
reconstruction and examination of the sequence of system and security-related
events and changes in the protection relay. Both audit trail events and process
related events can be examined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help
of Event List in LHMI and WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600.
The protection relay stores 2048 audit trail events to the nonvolatile audit trail.
Additionally, 1024 process events are stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the
audit trail and event list work according to the FIFO principle. Nonvolatile memory
is based on a memory type which does not need battery backup nor regular
component change to maintain the memory storage.
Audit trail events related to user authorization (login, logout, violation remote and
violation local) are defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined user names or user categories. The user
audit trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
REF615 29
Application Manual
Table 7: Audit trail events
Audit trail event Description

Configuration change Configuration files changed
Firmware change Firmware changed
Firmware change fail Firmware change failed
Attached to retrofit test case Unit has been attached to retrofit case
Removed from retrofit test case Removed from retrofit test case
Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely
Setting group local User changed setting group locally
Control remote DPC object control remote
Control local DPC object control local
Test on Test mode on
Test off Test mode off
Reset trips Reset latched trips (TRPPTRC*)
Setting commit Settings have been changed
Time change Time changed directly by the user. Note that this is not
used when the protection relay is synchronised proper-
ly by the appropriate protocol (SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588
v2).
View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail
Login Successful login from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP
or LHMI.
Logout Successful logout from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI,
FTP or LHMI.
Password change Password changed
Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool
Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period
Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),
WHMI, FTP or LHMI.
Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),
WHMI, FTP or LHMI.
PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process related
events. Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events view. Since
only the administrator has the right to read audit trail, authorization must be used
in PCM600. The audit trail cannot be reset, but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter
data. Audit trail events can be configured to be visible also in LHMI/WHMI Event list
together with process related events.
To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define the Authority
logging level parameter via Configuration > Authorization > Security.
This exposes audit trail events to all users.
30 REF615
Application Manual
Table 8: Comparison of authority logging levels
Audit trail event Authority logging level

None Configura- Setting Setting Settings All
tion change group group, edit
control
Configuration change ● ● ● ● ●
Firmware change ● ● ● ● ●
Firmware change fail ● ● ● ● ●
Attached to retrofit ● ● ● ● ●
test case
Removed from retro- ● ● ● ● ●
fit test case
Setting group remote ● ● ● ●
Setting group local ● ● ● ●
Control remote ● ● ●
Control local ● ● ●
Test on ● ● ●
Test off ● ● ●
Reset trips ● ● ●
Setting commit ● ●
Time change ●
View audit log ●
Login ●
Logout ●
Password change ●
Firmware reset ●
Violation local ●
Violation remote ●
2.7 Communication
The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including
®
IEC 61850, IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus
DPV1 communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter
SPA-ZC 302. Operational information and controls are available through these
protocols. However, some communication functionality, for example, horizontal
communication between the protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC 61850
communication protocol.
The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and control
functions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and fault
records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings
are available to any Ethernet-based application in the IEC 60255-24 standard
COMTRADE file format. The protection relay can send and receive binary signals
from other devices (so-called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1
GOOSE profile, where the highest performance class with a total transmission time
REF615 31
Application Manual
of 3 ms is supported. Furthermore, the protection relay supports sending and

receiving of analog values using GOOSE messaging. The protection relay meets
the GOOSE performance requirements for tripping applications in distribution
substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard.
The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one
client connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850
and Modbus.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed
on integrated optional communication modules. The protection relay can be
connected to Ethernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector
(100Base-TX) or the fiber-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial
interface is available for RS-232/RS-485 communication.
2.7.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring

For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the
external switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled
in the switches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the
network. The protection relay itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP.
The ring recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-
up/link-down events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a better
performance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch
furthest from the protection relay loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge
priority = 0) and the bridge priority increases towards the protection relay loop.
The end links of the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external
switch or to two adjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring requires
a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection
relays.
Client A Client B
Network A
Network B
Managed Ethernet switch Managed Ethernet switch

with RSTP support with RSTP support
Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution
32 REF615
Application Manual
The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30

protection relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to be connected,
it is recommended that the network is split into several rings with
no more than 30 protection relays per ring. Each protection relay
has a 50-μs store-and-forward delay, and to fulfil the performance
requirements for fast horizontal communication, the ring size is limited
to 30 protection relays.
2.7.2 Ethernet redundancy

IEC 61850 specifies a network redundancy scheme that improves the system
availability for substation communication. It is based on two complementary
protocols defined in the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocol
PRP and high-availability seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely
on the duplication of all transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one
logical network connection. Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a
link or switch with a zero-switchover time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-time
requirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and time
synchronization.
PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks.
HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve
cost-effective redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that
forwards frames from port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for all 615
series protection relays. However, RED615 supports this option only over fiber
optics.
IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in 2010.
These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supports IEC 62439-3:2012
and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.
PRP
Each PRP node, called a double attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to
two independent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are
called LAN A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failure
independence, and they can have different topologies. Both networks operate in
parallel, thus providing zero-time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy
to avoid communication failures. Non-PRP nodes, called single attached nodes
(SANs), are either attached to one network only (and can therefore communicate
only with DANs and SANs attached to the same network), or are attached through a
redundancy box, a device that behaves like a DAN.
REF615 33
Application Manual
COM600
SCADA
Ethernet switch Ethernet switch

IEC 61850 PRP
Figure 7: PRP solution
In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of

the PRP networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box
device or an Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network
and SAN to remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some
cases, default PC workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length
Ethernet frames with the PRP trailer.
There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to
a PRP network.
• Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting to
PRP and normal networks
• By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN
• By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port
HSR
HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the two
directions as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two frames,
one over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and
each node forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other. When the
originating node receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid loops;
therefore, no ring protocol is needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs, such as
laptops and printers, must be attached through a “redundancy box” that acts as a
ring element. For example, a 615 or 620 series protection relay with HSR support can
be used as a redundancy box.
34 REF615
Application Manual
Figure 8: HSR solution
2.7.3 Process bus

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2 defines the transmission of Sampled Measured Values
within the substation automation system. International Users Group created a
guideline IEC 61850-9-2 LE that defines an application profile of IEC 61850-9-2
to facilitate implementation and enable interoperability. Process bus is used for
distributing process data from the primary circuit to all process bus compatible
devices in the local network in a real-time manner. The data can then be processed
by any protection relay to perform different protection, automation and control
functions.
UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current
and voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGear
Digital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to all
devices, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.
With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value
can be replaced with Ethernet communication. Transmitting measurement samples
over process bus brings also higher error detection because the signal transmission
is automatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is the
possibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals.
REF615 35
Application Manual
Common Ethernet
Station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization
GOOSE
GOOSE
GOOSE
GOOSE
GOOSE
GOOSE
GOOSE
SMV
SMV
SMV
SMV
SMV
SMV
SMV
Figure 9: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck
The 615 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog
currents and voltages. The measured values are transferred as sampled values
using the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet network
as the IEC 61850-8-1 station bus. The intended application for sampled values is
sharing the measured voltages from one 615 series protection relay to other devices
with phase voltage based functions and 9-2 support.
The 615 series protection relays with process bus based applications use IEEE
1588 v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) according to IEEE C37.238-2011 Power
Profile for high accuracy time synchronization. With IEEE 1588 v2, the cabling
infrastructure requirement is reduced by allowing time synchronization information
to be transported over the same Ethernet network as the data communications.
36 REF615
Application Manual
Primary Secondary
IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2
master clock master clock
(optional)
Managed HSR Managed HSR

Ethernet Ethernet
switch switch
IEC 61850
HSR
SMV traffic
Backup 1588
master clock
Figure 10: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE 1588
v2 time synchronization
The process bus option is available for all 615 series protection relays equipped
with phase voltage inputs. Another requirement is a communication card with IEEE
1588 v2 support (COM0031...COM0037). However, RED615 supports this option only
with the communication card variant having fiber optic station bus ports. See the
IEC 61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration
details.
2.7.4 Secure communication

The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transfer
protocol. If the Secure Communication parameter is activated, protocols require
TLS based encryption method support from the clients. In this case WHMI must be
connected from a Web browser using the HTTPS protocol and in case of file transfer
the client must use FTPS.
REF615 37
Application Manual
REF615 standard configurations 1MRS756378 U
3 REF615 standard configurations
3.1 Standard configurations

REF615 is available with twelve alternative standard configurations. The standard
signal configuration can be altered by means of the signal matrix or the graphical
application functionality of the Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600.
Further, the application configuration functionality of PCM600 supports the
creation of multi-layer logic functions using various logical elements, including
timers and flip-flops. By combining protection functions with logic function blocks,
the relay configuration can be adapted to user-specific application requirements.
The relay is delivered from the factory with default connections described in
the functional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-function
connections and alarm LEDs. Some of the supported functions in REF615 must be
added with the Application Configuration tool to be available in the Signal Matrix
tool and in the relay. The positive measuring direction of directional protection
functions is towards the outgoing feeder.
Table 9: Standard configurations
Description Std. conf.
Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection A
Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection and circuit- B

breaker condition monitoring (RTD option)
Non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection C
Non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection and circuit-breaker D

condition monitoring (RTD option)
Non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault protection, voltage- E

based measurements and circuit-breaker condition monitoring (RTD option)
Directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage-based protection F

and measurements, and circuit-breaker condition monitoring (RTD option)
Directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage-based protection G

and measurements, and circuit-breaker condition monitoring (sensor inputs
and optional synchro-check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE)
Non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage and frequency H

based protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breaker con-
dition monitoring (RTD option)
Directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltage and frequency J

based protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breaker con-
dition monitoring (optional power quality and RTD option)
38 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U REF615 standard configurations
Description Std. conf.
Directional and non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, high- K

impedance restricted earth-fault protection, voltage and frequency based
protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breaker condition
monitoring (optional power quality and fault locator)
Directional and non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection with L

multifrequency neutral admittance, voltage, frequency and power based pro-
tection and measurements, and circuit-breaker condition monitoring (sensor
inputs, optional power quality, fault locator, interconnetion protection and
synchro-check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE)
Directional and non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection with N

multifrequency neutral admittance, voltage, frequency and power based pro-
tection and measurements, high-impedance differential protection, synchro-
check and circuit-breaker condition monitoring (optional power quality, fault
locator and interconnection protection)
3.1.1 Supported functions in REF615

Table 10: Supported functions
Function IEC 61850 A B C D E F G H J K L N

FE01 FE02 FE03 FE04 FE05 FE06 FE07 FE08 FE09 FE10 FE11 FE12
Protection
Three-phase non- PHLPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
directional overcur-
rent protection,
low stage
Three-phase non- PHHPTOC 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
rent protection,
high stage
Three-phase non- PHIPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
rent protection, in-
stantaneous stage
Three-phase direc- DPHLPDOC 2 2 2 1 2 2
tional overcurrent
protection, low
stage
Three-phase direc- DPHHPDOC 1 1 1 1 1 1
tional overcurrent
protection, high
stage
Non-directional EFLPTOC 2 2 2 2 2 2
earth-fault protec-
tion, low stage
Non-directional EFHPTOC 1 1 1 1 1
earth-fault protec-
tion, high stage
Non-directional EFIPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1
earth-fault protec-
tion, instantaneous
stage
Directional earth- DEFLPDEF 2 21 2 2 2 2 1 22 2
fault protection,
low stage
1 "Uo measured" is always used.

2 "Uo calculated" is always used.
REF615 39
Application Manual

Directional earth- DEFHPDEF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
fault protection,
high stage
Admittance-based EFPADM (3) 1 3 (3) 1 3 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3) 2 3 (3) 3 (3) 2 3 (3) 3
earth-fault protec-
tion
Wattmetric-based WPWDE (3) 1 3 (3) 1 3 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3) 2 3 (3) 3 (3) 2 3 (3) 3
earth-fault protec-
tion 3
Transient/intermit- INTRPTEF 1 14 14 14 14 124 14
tent earth-fault
protection
Harmonics-based HAEFPTOC (1) 3 4 (1) 3 4 (1) 3 4 (1) 3 4 (1) 3 4 (1) 3 4
earth-fault protec-
tion 3
Non-directional EFHPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(cross-country)
earth-fault protec-
tion, using calcula-
ted Io
Negative-sequence NSPTOC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
overcurrent protec-
tion
Phase discontinui- PDNSPTOC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ty protection
Residual overvolt- ROVPTOV 31 31 3 3 32 3 3 2 32 3
age protection
Three-phase under- PHPTUV 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
voltage protection
Three-phase over- PHPTOV 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
voltage protection
Positive-sequence PSPTUV 1 1 1 2 2
undervoltage pro-
tection
Negative-sequence NSPTOV 1 1 1 2 2
overvoltage pro-
tection
Frequency protec- FRPFRQ 3 3 3 6 6
tion
Three-phase ther- T1PTTR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
mal protection for
feeders, cables and
distribution trans-
formers
High-impedance HREFPDIF 1
based restricted
earth-fault protec-
tion
High-impedance HIAPDIF 1
differential protec-
tion for phase A
High-impedance HIBPDIF 1
tion for phase B
High-impedance HICPDIF 1
tion for phase C
Circuit breaker fail- CCBRBRF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ure protection
3 One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F
or harmonics-based E/F.
4 "Io measured" is always used.
5 "IoB measured" is always used.
40 REF615
Application Manual

Three-phase inrush INRPHAR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
detector
Switch onto fault CBPSOF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Master trip TRPPTRC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(3) (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6
Arc protection ARCSARC (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
Multipurpose pro- MAPGAPC 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
tection
Fault locator SCEFRFLO (1) (1) (1)
High-impedance PHIZ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
fault detection
Reverse power/di- DOPPDPR 2 2
rectional overpow-
er protection
Multifrequency ad- MFADPSDE 1 1
mittance-based
earth-fault protec-
tion
Interconnection functions
Directional reactive DQPTUV (1) (1)
power undervolt-
age protection
Low-voltage ride- LVRTPTUV (3) (3)
through protection
Voltage vector VVSPPAM (1) (1)
shift protection
Power quality
Current total de- CMHAI (1) (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7
mand distortion
Voltage total har- VMHAI (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7
monic distortion
Voltage variation PHQVVR (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7 (1) 7
Control
Circuit-breaker CBXCBR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
control
Disconnector con- DCXSWI 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
trol
Earthing switch ESXSWI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
control
Disconnector posi- DCSXSWI 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
tion indication
Earthing switch in- ESSXSWI 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
dication
Autoreclosing DARREC (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Synchronism and SECRSYN (1) 1 1 1 (1) 8 1
energizing check
Condition monitoring and supervision
Circuit-breaker SSCBR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
condition monitor-
ing
6 Master trip is included and connected to the corresponding HSO in the configuration only when
the BIO0007 module is used. If additionally the ARC option is selected, ARCSARC is connected in
the configuration to the corresponding master trip input.
7 Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion,
voltage variation and voltage unbalance.
8 Available only with IEC 61850-9-2
REF615 41
Application Manual

Trip circuit supervi- TCSSCBR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
sion
Current circuit su- CCSPVC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
pervision
Current transform- HZCCASPVC 1
er supervision for
high-impedance
protection scheme
for phase A
Current transform- HZCCBSPVC 1
er supervision for
high-impedance
protection scheme
for phase B
Current transform- HZCCCSPVC 1
er supervision for
high-impedance
protection scheme
for phase C
Fuse failure super- SEQSPVC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
vision
Runtime counter MDSOPT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
for machines and
devices
Measurement
Disturbance re- RDRE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
corder
Load profile record LDPRLRC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fault record FLTRFRC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Three-phase cur- CMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
rent measurement
Sequence current CSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Residual current RESCMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
measurement
Three-phase volt- VMMXU 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2
age measurement
(1) 8 (1) 8
Residual voltage RESVMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Sequence voltage VSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
measurement
Three-phase power PEMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
and energy meas-
urement
RTD/mA measure- XRGGIO130 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
ment
Frequency meas- FMMXU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
urement
IEC 61850-9-2 LE SMVSENDER (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
sampled value
sending 8
IEC 61850-9-2 LE SMVRCV (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
sampled value re-
ceiving (voltage
sharing) 8 9
Other
Minimum pulse TPGAPC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
timer
(2 pcs)
9 Available only with COM0031...0037
42 REF615
Application Manual

Minimum pulse TPSGAPC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

timer
(2 pcs, second res-
olution)
Minimum pulse TPMGAPC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

timer
(2 pcs, minute res-
olution)
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time delay off (8 TOFGAPC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
pcs)
Time delay on (8 TONGAPC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
pcs)
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Generic control SPCGAPC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
point (16 pcs)
Analog value scal- SCA4GAPC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
ing
(4 pcs)
Integer value move MVI4GAPC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(4 pcs)
1, 2, ... = Number of included instances. The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection
function blocks available in the standard configuration.
() = optional
3.1.2 Addition of control functions for primary devices and the

use of binary inputs and outputs
If extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to the
configuration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complement
the standard configuration.
If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient,
it is possible either to modify the chosen standard configuration in order to release
some binary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configured for
other purposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for example
RIO600, to the protection relay.
The external I/O module’s binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less
time-critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing
some initially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the protection relay’s standard
configuration.
The suitability of the protection relay’s binary outputs which have been selected for
primary device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry and
breaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are not
met, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.
REF615 43
Application Manual
3.2 Connection diagrams

L1
L2
L3
A
da dn
REF615
X120 X100
1 + 1
BI 1 Uaux
Positive 2
-
2
Current
Direction 3 3
BI 2
IRF
4
4 5
BI 3
P1
60 - PO1
5 210V
S1
Uo
6 N
6
2) 7
S2
7 1/5A
IL1
8 N PO2
P2 9 1/5A
IL2 8
10 N 9
11 1/5A 10
IL3 SO1
12 N
13 1/5A 11
Io 12
P1 S1
14 N 13
S2 SO2
P2
X110 14
1 16
BI 1 3)
PO3
2
17
3 15
BI 2 19
4 TCS1 18
5 20
BI 3 22
6
PO4
BI 4 21
7 23
TCS2 24
8
BI 5
9
X110
3)
BI 6 14
10
SO1
11 16
BI 7 15
12
17
SO2
BI 8
13 19
18
20
X130 SO3
1 1) 4) 22
BI 1 21
2 23
SO4
BI 2 24
3
4
BI 3
5 X130
10
BI 4 1) 4) SO1
6
12
7 11
BI 5 13
8
SO2
15
BI 6 14
9
16
SO3
18
17
X13
1) 1) Optional
Light sensor input 1
X130 module optional in REF615 conf B
X14 2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
1) mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
Light sensor input 2 unit is detached
3) REF615 conf B: BIO0005 module (8BI+4BO)
X15 Alternative module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
1)
Light sensor input 3 4) REF615 conf B: BIO0006 module (6BI+3BO)
Alternative module RTD0001 (6RTD+2mA) 2
Figure 11: Connection diagram for the A and B configurations
2 Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant B
44 REF615
Application Manual
L1
L2
L3
Positive
Current REF615
Direction
X120 X100
1 + 1
BI 1 U aux
2 2
-
3 3
BI 2
IRF
4
4 5
BI 3
P1
PO1
5
S1 BI 4
6 6
S2
7 1/5A 2) 7
IL1
8 N PO2
P2 9 1/5A
IL2 8
10 N 9
11 1/5A 10
IL3 SO1
12 N
13 1/5A 11
Io 12
14 N 13
SO2
X110 14
1 3) 16
BI 1 PO3
2
17
3 15
BI 2
4 19
TCS1 18
5 20
BI 3 22
6
PO4
BI 4 21
7 23
TCS2 24
8
BI 5
9
3) X110
BI 6 14
10
SO1
11 16
BI 7
12 15
17
BI 8 SO2
13 19
18
20
SO3
X130
1) 4) 22
1 21
BI 1
2 23
SO4
BI 2 24
3
4
BI 3 X130
5
10
BI 4 1) 4) SO1
6
12
7 11
BI 5 13
8
SO2
15
BI 6 14
9
16
SO3
18
17
X13
1) 1) Optional
X130 module optional in REF615 conf D
X14 2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
1) mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
Light sensor input 2 unit is detached
3) REF615 conf D: BIO0005 module (8BI+4BO)
X15 Alternative module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
1)
Light sensor input 3 4) REF615 conf D: BIO0006 module (6BI+3BO)
Alternative module RTD0001 (6RTD+2mA) 3
Figure 12: Connection diagram for the C and D configurations
3 Additional BIO-module (X110 in the diagram) is included in the IED variant D
REF615 45
Application Manual
Figure 13: Connection diagram for the E and F configurations
46 REF615
Application Manual
L1
L2
L3
REF615
X130 X100
Positive +
Current 1
1 0,2/1A
U aux
Direction 2 Io 2
N -
3
X131 IRF
4
4 5
IL1
5
7 PO1
U1
8
6
X132 7
4 PO2
IL2
5
8
7 9
U2
8 10
X133 SO1
11
4 12
IL3
5 13
7 SO2
U3
8 14
16
PO3
17
P1 S1 15
19
S2
TCS1 18
P2
20
X110 22
PO4
1
BI 1 2) 21
2
23
3 TCS2 24
BI 2
4
5 X110
BI 3
6 2) 14
SO1
BI 4 16
7 15
17
8
BI 5 SO2
9
19
18
BI 6 20
10
SO3
11 22
BI 7
12 21
23
BI 8 SO4
13 24
X13
1)
X14
1)
1) Optional
X15 2) BIO0005 Module (8BI+4BO)
1)
Light sensor input 3 Alternative Module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
Figure 14: Connection diagram for the G and L configurations with SIM0002 module
REF615 47
Application Manual
L1
L2
L3
REF615
X130 X100
Positive +
Current 1
1 0,2/1A
U aux
Direction 2 Io 2
N -
3
X131 IRF
L1/A
4
1 5
IL1
2
7 PO1
U1
8
6
X132 7
L2/B
1 PO2
IL2
2
8
7 9
U2
8 10
X133 SO1
L3/C
11
1 12
IL3
2 13
7 SO2
U3
8 14
16
PO3
17
P1 S1 15
19
S2
TCS1 18
P2
20
X110 22
PO4
1
BI 1 2) 21
2
23
3 TCS2 24
BI 2
4
5 X110
BI 3
6 2) 14
SO1
BI 4 16
7 15
17
8
BI 5 SO2
9
19
18
BI 6 20
10
SO3
11 22
BI 7
12 21
23
BI 8 SO4
13 24
X13
1)
X14
1)
1) Optional
X15 2) BIO0005 Module (8BI+4BO)
1)
Light sensor input 3 Alternative Module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
Figure 15: Connection diagram for the G and L configurations with SIM0005 module
48 REF615
Application Manual
Figure 16: Connection diagram for the H, J and N configurations
REF615 49
Application Manual
L1
L2
L3
A
n
N REF615
X130 X100
1 + 1
a BI 1 Uaux
2
-
2
da dn 3
BI 2 3
4 IRF
4
5
BI 3 5
6
PO1
7
BI 4
8 6
60 - 7
9 210V
U12B (for SECRSYN1)
10 N PO2
60 -
11 210V
U1 8
12 N 9
60 - 10
13 210V
U2 SO1
14 N
60 -
15 210V
11
U3 12
16 N 13
60 -
17 210V SO2
Uo
18 N
14
16
PO3
X120
Positive 17
Current 1 1/5A 2) 15
not in use
Direction 19
2 N TCS1 18
3 1/5A
not in use 20
4 N 22
P1 5 1/5A PO4
S1 IoB (for HREFPDIF1)
6 N 21
S2 23
P2 7 1/5A
IL1 TCS2 24
8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N X110
11 1/5A
14
IL3 3)
12 N SO1
13 1/5A
16
Io 15
14 N
17
P1 S1
SO2
X110 19
P2 S2
18
1 20
BI 1 3)
2 SO3
22
3 21
BI 2
4 23
SO4
5
BI 3 24
P1 S1 6
P2 S2 BI 4
7
8
BI 5
9
BI 6
10
11
BI 7
12
BI 8
13
X13
1)
X14
1) 1) Optional
Light sensor input 2 2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
X15 unit is detached
1) 3) BIO0005 Module (8BI+4BO)
Alternative Module BIO0007 (8BI+3HSO)
Figure 17: Connection diagram for the K configuration
50 REF615
Application Manual
3.3 Standard configuration A
3.3.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications
in isolated and resonant-earthed distribution networks. The configuration
also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based on
admittance or wattmetric-based principles.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory
with default settings and parameters. The end-user flexibility for incoming,
outgoing and internal signal designation within the protection relay enables this
configuration to be further adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the
related functionality needs by modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
REF615 51
Application Manual
3.3.2 Functions
Uo
REF615 FEEDER PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY STANDARD

CONFIGURATION
A
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI ALSO AVAILABLE
- Disturbance and fault recorders

2× - Event log and recorded data
Master Trip
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization
- Self-supervision
94/86 I ESC Clear
- Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr - User management
2× - Web HMI
IL2 0 A
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>>

46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I
AND
ESC Clear
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF
CONDITION MONITORING COMMUNICATION

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I> 3I>> 3I2f> Protocols:
51P-1 51P-2 68 2× IEC 61850-8-1
OPTS TCS Modbus®
OPTM TCM IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Io
Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Io>> Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
51N-2 RS-485, RS-232
Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF
Uo - I, Io, Uo
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
3× 3× - Limit value supervision
Yo>→ Po>→ CB 1 - - Symmetrical components
21YN 32N
DC - -
OR Analog interface types 1)
ES - -
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
Current transformer 4
from technical documentation Voltage transformer 1
2)
Control and indication function for
primary object 1)
Conventional transformer inputs
3)
Status indication function for
primary object
3× 18×
Uo> MAP SOTF O→I
59G MAP SOTF 79
REMARKS
Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
function instances value function to be
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 18: Functionality overview for standard configuration A
52 REF615
Application Manual
3.3.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.
Table 11: Default connections for binary inputs
Binary input Description

X120-BI1 Blocking of overcurrent instantaneous stage
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed position indication
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open position indication
Table 12: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary output Description

X100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failure protection trip to upstream breaker
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 1
X100-SO1 General start indication
X100-SO2 General operate indication
Table 13: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description
1 Non-directional overcurrent operate
2 Directional or intermittent earth-fault operate
3 Double (cross country) earth-fault or residual overvoltage operate
4 Negative sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity operate
5 Thermal overload alarm
6 Breaker failure operate
7 Disturbance recorder triggered
8 –
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Arc protection operate
11 Autoreclose in progress
REF615 53
Application Manual
3.3.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 14: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –
Table 15: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode

1 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
2 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
EFPADM1 - start
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
9 EFPADM3 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
10 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
11 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
12 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
13 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
14 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
17 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
18 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
54 REF615
Application Manual

19 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
20 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
21 DEFHPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1- operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
22 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off
23 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
24 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
25 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
26 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
27 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
28 ARCSARC1 - ARC flt det Level trigger off
ARCSARC2 - ARC flt det
29 ARCSARC1 - operate Positive or rising
32 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
33 DARREC1 - close CB Level trigger off
34 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
35 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
36 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
37 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
3.3.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-
to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the protection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels
REF615 55
Application Manual
available for the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of
the disturbance recorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. The
residual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs,
an external core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The residual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either the residually
connected VTs or an open delta connected VT.
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based
on individual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting
group settings available in the protection relay.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
instantiated in the configuration.
3.3.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing
the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START PHLPTOC1_START
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
Figure 19: Overcurrent protection functions
56 REF615
Application Manual
The output INRPHAR1_BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 enables

either blocking the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the
available overcurrent or earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
Figure 20: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the
feeder against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Figure 21: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to

the IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method is based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or used alternatively together
with admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM or wattmetric-based earth-
fault protection WPWDE. In addition, there is a dedicated protection stage
INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent
earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
REF615 57
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFLPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DEFHPDEF1_START
RCA_CTL
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 22: Directional earth-fault protection functions
INTRPTEF1
BLOCK OPERATE INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
START INTRPTEF1_START
BLK_EF
Figure 23: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection functions
WPWDE1
BLOCK OPERATE WPWDE1_OPERATE
RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O WPWDE_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 24: Wattmetric protection function
58 REF615
Application Manual
EFPADM1
BLOCK OPERATE EFPADM1_OPERATE
RELEASE START EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O EFPADM_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 25: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,

EFHPTOC1 protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or
compensated networks. This protection function uses the calculated residual
current originating from the phase currents.
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFHPTOC1_START
Figure 26: Non-directional earth-fault protection
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normal

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
START PDNSPTOC1_START
Figure 27: Phase discontinuity protection
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers

T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load conditions.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR OPERATE T1PTTR1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START T1PTTR1_START
TEMP_AMB ALARM T1PTTR1_ALARM
BLK_CLOSE
Figure 28: Thermal overcurrent protection function
REF615 59
Application Manual
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET
and TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O START TRBU CCBRBRF1_TRBU
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
Figure 29: Circuit breaker failure protection function
Three arc protection ARCSARC1...3 stages are included as an optional function.

The arc protection offers individual function blocks for three arc sensors that can
be connected to the IED. Each arc protection function block has two different
operation modes, that is, with or without the phase and residual current check.
The operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to both trip logic TRPPTRC1
and TRPPTRC2.
60 REF615
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
BLOCK OPERATE ARCSARC1_OPERATE
REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC_OPERATE
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 30: Arc protection
The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signals

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible
to create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By
default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input.
A control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1_SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with
the CB_READY input in DARREC1. This signal is not connected in the configuration.
The open command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO3, whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output
X100:PO1.
Set the parameters for DARREC1 properly.
Check the initialization signals of DARREC1.
REF615 61
Application Manual
DARREC1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB DARREC1_OPEN_CB
OR6 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B1 O INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 INIT_5 LOCKED
B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B4 DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED CB_POS
CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O RECL_ON
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SYNC
B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B1 O
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 31: Autoreclosing function
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 provides earth-fault protection by

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. This can be used, for example,
as a nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault
functionality.
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
START ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 32: Residual voltage protection function
62 REF615
Application Manual
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to minimum pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O B2
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 B3
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 B4
B4 B5 TPGAPC1
B5 B6
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6 OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 B2
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 B3
ROVPTOV1_START B4 B4
OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
B4
B5
B6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 33: General start and operate signals
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions are
available at binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. Both the trip logic functions are
provided with lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input has been
assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a
push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with high
speed binary outputs options.
REF615 63
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK TRIP TRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O OPERATE CL_LKOUT
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
Figure 34: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
64 REF615
Application Manual
3.3.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals
from different functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the
disturbance recorder.
OR6
RDRE1
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O
WPWDE1_START B2 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
EFPADM1_START B3 PHHPTOC1_START C2
B4 PHHPTOC2_START C3
B5 PHIPTOC1_START C4
B6 NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
C7
C8
C9
OR6 INTRPTEF1_START C10
EFHPTOC1_START C11
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O PDNSPTOC1_START C12
WPWDE2_START B2 T1PTTR1_START C13
EFPADM2_START B3 OR6 ROVPTOV1_START C14
B4 ROVPTOV2_START C15
B5 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ROVPTOV3_START C16
B6 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C17
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C18
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 C19
B5 C20
B6 C21
OR6 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C22
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C23
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C24
WPWDE3_START B2 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C25
EFPADM3_START B3 OR T1PTTR1_OPERATE C26
B4 C27
B5 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C28
B6 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C29
ARCSARC2_OPERATE C30
DARREC1_INPRO C32
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C33
OR6 OR DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C34
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C35
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C36
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 B2 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C37
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 C38
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B4 C39
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B6 C41
OR6 C42
C43
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C44
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 C45
OR6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C46
B4 C47
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O B5 C48
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 B6 C49
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3 C50
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
OR6 C54
C55
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C56
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C57
B4 C59
B5 C60
B6 C61
C62
C63
C64
Figure 36: Disturbance recorder
3.3.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both the functions are
blocked by the master mrip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker
tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker normally
open auxiliary contact.
REF615 65
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING BLOCK ALARM TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM B1 O TCSSCBR_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
Figure 37: Trip circuit supervision function
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 38: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
3.3.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. The
input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is based on the status
of the trip logics. However, other signals can be connected based on the application
needs.
The SYNC_ITL_BYP input can be used, for example, to always enable the closing
of the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker truck is in the test position.
SYNC_ITL_BYP overrides, for example, active interlocking conditions when the
circuit breaker truck is closed in service position.
CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN SELECTED CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE EXE_OP CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE ENA_OPEN EXE_CL CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
FALSE BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Figure 39: Circuit breaker control logic: Circuit breaker 1
OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL B1 O CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 40: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for the closing coil of circuit breaker
1
66 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 41: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for the opening coil of circuit breaker
1
NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT
AND
B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT
Figure 42: Circuit breaker close enable logic
The configuration includes the logic for generating circuit breaker external closing
and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command and
modify it according to the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
Figure 43: External closing command for circuit breaker
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B1 O CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
Figure 44: External opening command for circuit breaker
3.3.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. Similarly, the sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures
the sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.
The measurements can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
REF615 67
Application Manual
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
Figure 45: Current measurement: Three phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
Figure 46: Current measurement: Sequence current measurements
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 47: Current measurement: Residual current measurements
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 48: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurements
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
Figure 49: Other measurement: Data monitoring
3.3.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
Figure 50: Default binary inputs - X120
68 REF615
Application Manual
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
Figure 51: Default binary outputs - X100
REF615 69
Application Manual
LED1
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
EFPADM_OPERATE B2 RESET
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED4
OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
70 REF615
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
ARCSARC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
Figure 52: Default LED connection
3.3.3.7 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection function
MAPGAPC, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different types
of timer functions. These functions are not included in application configuration
but they can be added based on the system requirements.
3.4 Standard configuration B
3.4.1 Applications
admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-based principles.
REF615 71
Application Manual
3.4.2 Functions
Uo

CONFIGURATION
B

2× 3× - Event log and recorded data
Master Trip Master Trip - High-Speed Output module (optional)
Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr SNTP, IRIG-B
2× - User management
IL2 0 A
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>> - Web HMI

46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I
AND
ESC Clear
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
51P-1 51P-2 68 IEC 61850-8-1
2×
CBCM OPTS TCS Modbus®
CBCM OPTM TCM IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Io
Interfaces:
Io>> Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
51N-2 RS-485, RS-232
HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→ PHIZ
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF HIZ
Uo Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3) - I, Io, Uo

Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA CB 1 - - Load profile record
21YN 32N 51NHA - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
DC 2 3
OR OR - Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
1)
from technical documentation Analog interface types 1)
2)
primary object Current transformer 4
3)
primary object Voltage transformer 1
1)
3× 18×
Uo> MAP SOTF O→I
59G MAP SOTF 79
6xRTD REMARKS
2xmA
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 53: Functionality overview for standard configuration B
72 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI2 Directional earth-fault protection's basic angle control
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure indication
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (test position) indication
X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication
X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker closed indication
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open indication

X110-SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110-SO2 Overcurrent operate alarm
X110-SO3 Earth-fault operate alarm
X110-HSO1 Arc protection instance 1 operate activated
LED Description
2 Directional/intermittent earth-fault operate
3 Double (cross country) earth-fault or residual overvoltage operate
REF615 73
Application Manual
LED Description
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

EFPADM1 - start
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
WPWDE3 - start
74 REF615
Application Manual

PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
REF615 75
Application Manual


The residual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either the residually
connected VTs or an open delta connected VT.

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage,
PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
76 REF615
Application Manual
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
The upstream blocking from the start of the second high stage of three-phase non-
directional overcurrent protection PHHPTOC2 is connected to the binary output
X110:SO1. This output can be used for sending a blocking signal to the relevant
overcurrent protection stage of the IED at the infeeding bay.
OR6
PHHPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 55: Upstream blocking logic
The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 enables either blocking
the function or multiplying the active settings for any of the available overcurrent or
earth-fault function blocks.
INRPHAR1
REF615 77
Application Manual

NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively used together
fault protection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1.
In addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-
based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in
compensated networks.
The binary input X110:BI2 is used for controlling directional earth-fault protection
block's relay characteristic angle (RCA: 0°, -90°) or operation mode (IoSinφ, IoCosφ)
change. The same input is also available for wattmetric protection.
78 REF615
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
DEFHPDEF1
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
B4
B5
B6
INTRPTEF1
BLK_EF
Figure 59: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection functions
REF615 79
Application Manual
WPWDE1
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block EFHPTOC protects from

double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated networks. The protection
function uses the calculated residual current originating from the phase currents.
80 REF615
Application Manual
EFHPTOC1
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects from interruptions in the

normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1

T1PTTR1
BLK_CLOSE
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The output TRBU gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to the
binary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4 B4
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary outputs, the
individual operate signals from ARCSARC1..3 are connected to dedicated trip logic
REF615 81
Application Manual
TRPPTRC3...5. The outputs of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at high speed outputs

X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2, and X110:HSO3 respectively.
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
RST_LKOUT
Figure 66: Arc protection with dedicated HSO

autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR-SELECTED signal.
82 REF615
Application Manual
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connected
to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command
from the autorecloser is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO3, whereas
the close command is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 INIT_6 PROT_CRD
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INHIBIT_RECL
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 RECL_ON
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 SYNC
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by

functionality.
REF615 83
Application Manual
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
timer TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC is connected to binary outputs.
OR6 OR6 TPGAPC1
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
PHHPTOC1_START B2 B2 IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
PHHPTOC2_START B3 B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4 B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
OR6
OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
EFPADM1_START B4 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
EFPADM2_START B5 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFPADM3_START B6 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
OR6
OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_START B4 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_START B5 EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
OR6
WPWDE1_START B1 O
WPWDE2_START B2 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE3_START B3 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
B4 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B5 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two
trip logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, the binary input has
84 REF615
Application Manual
been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button. Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED
is ordered with high speed binary outputs options.
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 85
Application Manual

The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to trigger
the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbance
recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals
from different functions and few binary inputs are also connected.
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O RDRE1
WPWDE1_START B2
EFPADM1_START B3 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
C7
C8
OR6 C9
INTRPTEF1_START C10
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O EFHPTOC1_START C11
WPWDE2_START B2 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
EFPADM2_START B3 OR6 T1PTTR1_START C13
B6 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 ROVPTOV3_START C16
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C17
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C18
B5 C19
B6 C20
OR6 C21
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C22
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C23
WPWDE3_START B2 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C24
EFPADM3_START B3 OR INRPHAR1_BLK2H C25
B4 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C26
B5 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C27
B6 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C28
DARREC1_INPRO C32
OR6 OR DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C33
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C34
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C35
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 B2 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C36
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C37
OR6 C41
C42
OR6 ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C45
B4 C46
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O B5 C47
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2 B6 C48
B4 C50
B5 C51
B6 C52
OR6 C53
C54
B4 C58
B5 C59
B6 C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based on
the connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1
introduces various supervision methods.
Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
SSCBR1
BLOCK TRV_T_OP_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED POSOPEN TRV_T_CL_ALM SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED POSCLOSE SPR_CHR_ALM SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND OPEN_CB_EXE OPR_ALM SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND CLOSE_CB_EXE OPR_LO SSCBR1_OPR_LO
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
PRES_LO_IN IPOW_LO SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_IPOW PRES_ALM SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
RST_CB_WEAR PRES_LO SSCBR1_PRES_LO
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
RST_SPR_T INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS
Figure 73: Circuit-breaker condition monitoring function
86 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM B1 O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM B2
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM B3
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM B2
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
Figure 74: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm
NOT
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
Figure 75: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included, TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both the functions are
blocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker open
signal.
REF615 87
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6
Figure 77: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision function

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and ESXSWI1
are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in standard
configuration. The disconnector ( CB truck) and line side earthing switch status
information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST POSOPEN OPENPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
Figure 78: Disconnector control logic
ESSXSWI1
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED POSOPEN OPENPOS ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
Figure 79: Earthing switch control logic
input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the trip
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit-breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or breaker truck
is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
88 REF615
Application Manual
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
CBXCBR1
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Figure 80: Circuit-breaker control logic: Circuit breaker 1
Connect the additional signals required for the application for closing
and opening of circuit breaker.
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 81: Circuit-breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker
OR6
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP B1 O CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 82: Circuit-breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker
NOT AND6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM IN OUT
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
REF615 89
Application Manual
Connect additional signals for opening and closing of circuit breaker in

local or remote mode, if applicable for the configuration.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

in the back panel. Similarly, sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the
residual current.
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1. The measurements
can be seen from the LHMI and they are available under the measurement option in
the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks can generate low alarm
or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measured current values.
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1
gives the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
Figure 87: Current measurement: Sequence current measurements
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 88: Current measurement: Residual current measurements
90 REF615
Application Manual
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 89: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurements
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
Figure 91: Other measurement: Load profile record
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2 OR
B1 O X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL
B2
X110 (BIO-H).X110-Input 2
B1 O X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
B2
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
B2
B1 O X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
B2
B1 O X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
B2
B1 O X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
B2
B1 O X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
B2
Figure 92: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block
REF615 91
Application Manual
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
X110 (BIO-H).X110-HSO1
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
92 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
REF615 93
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
3.4.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes the overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate
logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimum pulse timer TPGAPC2 for
setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC2 is
connected to binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
PHxPTOC_OPERATE IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
Figure 97: Timer logic for overcurrent and earth-fault operate pulse
94 REF615
Application Manual

MAPGAPC, high-impedance fault detection function PHIZ, runtime counter for
machines and devices MDSOPT and different types of timers and control functions.
These functions are not included in application configuration but they can be added
based on the system requirements.
3.5 Standard configuration C
3.5.1 Applications
The standard configuration for non-directional overcurrent and non-directional
earth-fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder
applications in directly or resistance-earthed distribution networks.
REF615 95
Application Manual
3.5.2 Functions

CONFIGURATION
C

Master Trip
Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization
- Self-supervision
94/86 I ESC Clear
SNTP, IRIG-B
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr - User management
2× - Web HMI
IL2 0 A
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>>

46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I
AND
ESC Clear
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
51P-1 51P-2 68 2× IEC 61850-8-1
OPTS TCS Modbus®
OPTM TCM IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Interfaces:
Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
2× RS-485, RS-232
Io>>> Io> Io>> Redundant protocols:
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io

18×
MAP SOTF Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3) - I, Io
MAP SOTF - Limit value supervision
CB 1 - - Symmetrical components
DC - -
Analog interface types 1)
ES - -
1)
from technical documentation Voltage transformer -
2)
primary object 1)
3)
primary object
O→I
79
REMARKS
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 98: Functionality overview for standard configuration C
96 REF615
Application Manual


X120-BI4 Reset of master trip lockout

LED Description
2 Non-directional earth-fault operate
3 Sensitive earth-fault operate
8 –
REF615 97
Application Manual

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 –
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –
Channel ID text Level trigger

mode
7 EFLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
9 EFIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 – –
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
18 EFLPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
98 REF615
Application Manual

mode
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFIPTOC1 - operate
19 – –
25 ARCSARC1 - operate Positive or Rising
34 - 64 - -


REF615 99
Application Manual
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and

short-circuit protection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

100 REF615
Application Manual
NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Figure 101: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage is
dedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection EFLPTOC2.
EFIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFIPTOC1_START
EFHPTOC1
EFLPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START EFLPTOC1_START
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 102: Earth-fault protection functions
EFLPTOC2
Figure 103: Sensitive earth-fault protection function

REF615 101
Application Manual
PDNSPTOC1

T1PTTR1
BLK_CLOSE
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

and TRPPTRC2.
102 REF615
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 107: Arc protection

autoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with
the CB_READY input in DARREC1. This signal is not connected in the configuration.
The open command from the autorecloser is directly connected to binary output
X100:PO3, whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
Check the initialization signals of the DARREC1.
REF615 103
Application Manual
DARREC1
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_4 INPRO DARREC1_INPRO
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 108: Autoreclosing
timer TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC is connected to the binary outputs.
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O B2
EFLPTOC2_START B2 B3
EFIPTOC1_START B3 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B4 B5 TPGAPC1
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available
at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided
with lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration
setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, the binary input X120:BI4 has
been assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.
104 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed
to trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by
the disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and few binary inputs are also connected
to the disturbance recorder.
REF615 105
Application Manual
RDRE1
PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C16
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C17
B5 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C21
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
C24
OR ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DARREC1_INPRO C28
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C29
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C32
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C33
OR6 C34
C35
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C36
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 C37
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3 C38
B4 C39
B5 C40
B6 C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
OR6 C46
C47
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
signal.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
106 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6
Figure 114: Logic for trip circuit supervision function

input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is based on the status
of the trip logics. However, other signals can be connected based on the application
needs.
Any additional signals required by the application can be connected for
opening and closing of circuit breaker.
CBXCBR1
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
REF615 107
Application Manual
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 116: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for closing of circuit breaker 1
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 117: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for opening of circuit breaker 1
NOT
AND
B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT
Connect any additional signal applicable for the configuration for closing
and opening of circuit breaker in local or remote mode.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

in the back panel. Similarly, the sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures
108 REF615
Application Manual
the sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 122: Current measurement: Residual current measurement
CSMSQI1
Figure 123: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
Figure 124: Other measurements: Data monitoring

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
Figure 125: Default binary inputs X120
REF615 109
Application Manual
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
GENERAL_OPERATE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
Figure 126: Default binary outputs X100
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED3
OK
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
110 REF615
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

MAPGAPC, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different types
of timer functions. These functions are not included in application configuration
3.6 Standard configuration D
3.6.1 Applications
earth-fault protection is mainly intended for cable and overhead-line feeder
applications in directly or resistance earthed distribution networks.
REF615 111
Application Manual
3.6.2 Functions

CONFIGURATION
D

Master Trip
- High-Speed Output module (optional)
Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Time
Authorization

94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A

46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I
AND
ESC Clear
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
51P-1 51P-2 68 2× IEC 61850-8-1
CBCM OPTS TCS Modbus®
CBCM OPTM TCM IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Interfaces:
2× RS-485, RS-232
Io>>> Io> Io>> Io>HA Redundant protocols:
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 51NHA HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io

18×
- I, Io
MAP SOTF Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
- Limit value supervision
MAP SOTF
CB 1 - - Load profile record
2 3 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
DC
- Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
1)
from technical documentation Analog interface types 1)
2)
primary object Current transformer 4
3)
primary object Voltage transformer -
1)
O→I
79
REMARKS
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 128: Functionality overview for standard configuration D
112 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI2 Autoreclose external start command

LED Description
REF615 113
Application Manual
LED Description

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 –
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
11 – –
114 REF615
Application Manual

mode
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFIPTOC1 - operate
19 X110BI2 - ext start AutoReclose Level trigger off
34 - 64 - -

REF615 115
Application Manual

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
116 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. EFLPTOC2

stage is dedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection. According to the IED's order
code, the configuration can also include harmonics-based earth-fault protection
HAEFPTOC.
REF615 117
Application Manual
EFIPTOC1
EFHPTOC1
EFLPTOC1
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFLPTOC2
Figure 134: Sensitive earth-fault protection functions

PDNSPTOC1

T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load conditions. The output BLK_CLOSE is
used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_CLOSE
118 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output gives a backup trip to the breaker feeding
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
Three protection S1...3 stages are included as an optional function. The protection
offers individual function blocks for three sensors that can be connected to the IED.
Each protection function block has two different operation modes, that is, with or
without the phase and residual current check.
The operate signals S1...3 are connected to both trip logic TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2.
If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary outputs, the individual operate
signals from S1...3 are connected to dedicated trip logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output
of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at high speed outputs X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and
X110:HSO3.
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 138: Arc protection function
REF615 119
Application Manual
TRPPTRC3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. The INIT_6
input in the autoreclosing function block is controlled by a binary input X110: BI2
enabling the use of the external autoreclosing start command. It is possible to
create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with the
from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas the
close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
General start and operate signals from all the functions are connected to minimum
pulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The
output from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
120 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHHPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START
IN2 OUT2 GENERAL_OPERATE
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
at binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided
with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration
setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 has been
push button.
Other trip logics TRPPTRC3...4 are also available if the IED is ordered with high
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 121
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder, depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
122 REF615
Application Manual
RDRE1
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
OR6 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
B5 C18
B6 X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE C19
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C21
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
OR C24
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C27
DARREC1_INPRO C28
OR6 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C32
B4 C37
B5 C38
B6 C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
OR6 C44
C45
B4 C49
B5 C50
B6 C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

Set the parameters for SSCBR properly.
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Figure 145: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function
REF615 123
Application Manual
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR properly.
124 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type and DCXSWI1...2 and ESXSWI1
are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector ( CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
Figure 150: Disconnector 1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 151: Earthing switch 1
logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit breaker spring charging status.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or breaker truck is
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-
REF615 125
Application Manual
enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
circuit breaker is always enabled.
CBXCBR1
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Figure 152: Circuit breaker 1
Connect the additional signals required by the application for closing

and opening of the circuit breaker.
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 153: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 154: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
NOT AND6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
Figure 155: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic
126 REF615
Application Manual

local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the configuration.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
Figure 156: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
Figure 157: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
residual current.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
Figure 158: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
REF615 127
Application Manual
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
B1 O X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
128 REF615
Application Manual
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
Figure 165: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
REF615 129
Application Manual
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OK
RESET
LED3
OK
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
130 REF615
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

The configuration also includes overcurrent operate and earth-fault operate logic.
The operate logics are connected to the minimum pulse timer TPGAPC for setting
the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected
to the binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
OR
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
REF615 131
Application Manual

The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, high impedance fault detection function PHIZ, runtime counter MDSOPT
and different types of timers and control functions. These functions are not
included in application configuration but they can be added based on the system
requirements.
3.7 Standard configuration E
3.7.1 Applications
admittance or wattmetric-based principles.
132 REF615
Application Manual
3.7.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
E

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A

46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I ESC Clear
3I AND
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I> 3I>> 3I2f> 3I
Protocols:
51P-1 51P-2 68 IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®
60 CBCM MCS 3I IEC 60870-5-103
Io UL1UL2UL3 DNP3
Io Io Interfaces:
2× RS-485, RS-232
Io>> OPTS TCS Redundant protocols:
51N-2 OPTM TCM HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io
2× CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Uo Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3) - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
3× 3×
Yo>→ Po>→ DC 2 3 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
21YN 32N - Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
OR
1)
Check availability of binary inputs/outputs Analog interface types 1)
from technical documentation

2)
3)
primary object 1)
3× 18×
Uo> MAP SOTF O→I
59G MAP SOTF 79
2xRTD REMARKS
1xmA
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 169: Functionality overview for standard configuration E
REF615 133
Application Manual


X110-BI1 MCB open
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm
X120-BI4 Lock-out reset

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
LED Description
1 Non-directional overcurrent protection operated
2 Directional earth-fault protection operated
134 REF615
Application Manual
LED Description
3 Double (cross country) earth-fault or residual overvoltage protection op-
erated
4 Negative sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity protection operat-
ed
6 Circuit breaker failure protection backup protection operated
9 Supervision alarm
10 Arc fault detected

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
EFPADM1 - start
REF615 135
Application Manual

mode
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
WPWDE3 - start
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
136 REF615
Application Manual

mode
DARREC1 - unsuc recl
37 SEQSPVC1 - fusef3ph Level trigger off
38 SEQSPVC1 - fusefu Level trigger off
39 CCSPVC1 - fail Level trigger off

The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from a voltage transformer. The
residual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected VTs,
an open delta connected VT or calculated internally.

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage,
PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
REF615 137
Application Manual
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

138 REF615
Application Manual
feeder against phase unbalance. Both negative sequence overcurrent protections

are blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
fault protection WPWDE. In addition, there is a dedicated protection stage
INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent
earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
The binary input X110:BI2 is intended for controlling directional earth-fault
protection blocks' relay characteristic angle ( RCA: 0°, -90°) or operation mode
(IoSinφ, IoCosφ) change. The same input is also available for wattmetric protection.
REF615 139
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
DEFLPDEF2
DEFHPDEF1
OR6
B4
B5
B6
Figure 174: Directional earth-fault protection function
INTRPTEF1
BLK_EF
Figure 175: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function
140 REF615
Application Manual
WPWDE1
X110_BI2_RCA_CONTROL RCA_CTL START WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Non-directional earth-fault protection EFHPTOC protects against double earth-fault

situations in isolated or compensated networks. This protection function uses the
calculated residual current originating from the phase currents. The function is
blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
REF615 141
Application Manual
EFHPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The function
is blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of voltage
transformer.
PDNSPTOC1
CCSPVC1_FAIL BLOCK OPERATE PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1 detects overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of
the function is used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_CLOSE T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM3_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

142 REF615
Application Manual
individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to dedicated trip logic
TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at high speed outputs
X110:HSO1, X110:HSO2 and X110:HSO3.
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5
REF615 143
Application Manual

CB_READY input in DARREC1. DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
Check this initialization signals of the DARREC1.
DARREC1
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O INHIBIT_RECL
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 RECL_ON
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 SYNC
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 provides earth-fault protection by

functionality.
144 REF615
Application Manual
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs.
OR6 OR6 TPGAPC1
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
OR6 OR6 OR6

DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
B4 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
B5 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5 B5
OR6 OR6
INTRPTEF1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFHPTOC1_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PDNSPTOC1_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_START B4 ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_START B3 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_START B4 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
push button.
REF615 145
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
WPWDE1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_OPERATE B6
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B1 O
EFPADM1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM2_OPERATE B3
EFPADM3_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
146 REF615
Application Manual

OR6 RDRE1
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
B5 NSPTOC1_START C5
B6 NSPTOC2_START C6
C7
C8
C9
INTRPTEF1_START C10
OR6 EFHPTOC1_START C11
OR6 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O T1PTTR1_START C13
B5 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C17
B6 B5 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C18
B6 C19
C20
C21
OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C23
OR PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C24
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C25
B2 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O T1PTTR1_OPERATE C26
B3 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C27
B4 C28
B5 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C29
C32
DARREC1_INPRO C33
OR6 OR X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C35
B1 O B1 O SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C37
B2 B2 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C38
B3 CCSPVC1_FAIL C39
OR6 C43
C44
B4 C48
B5 C49
B6 C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
OR6 C55
C56
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
C63
C64
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2

Failures in the current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a failure
is detected, it is used to block current protection functions which measure the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCSPVC1
BLOCK FAIL CCSPVC1_FAIL
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
Figure 190: Current circuit supervision function
The fuse failure supervision function SEQSPVC1 detects failures in the voltage
measurement circuits. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
SEQSPVC1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED MINCB_OPEN
Figure 191: Fuse failure supervision function
REF615 147
Application Manual
The circuit-breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch

status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
Figure 193: Logic for circuit-breaker monitoring alarm
NOT
Figure 194: Logic for start of circuit-breaker spring charging
signal.
148 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
Figure 197: Disconnector 1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 198: Earthing switch 1
REF615 149
Application Manual
CBXCBR1
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 200: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 201: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B3
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
NOT
Connect the higher-priority conditions which must be set before

enabling the closing of circuit breaker. These conditions cannot be
bypassed using bypass feature of the function.
150 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE B1 O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 203: Circuit breaker close blocking logic
and opening commands with the IED in local or remote mode.

local or remote mode, if applicable for the configuration
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by three-
phase voltage measurement VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130
card in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the
residual voltage.
REF615 151
Application Manual
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile record
LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to
observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
Figure 209: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement
VSMSQI1
Figure 210: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
Figure 211: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement
FMMXU1
Figure 212: Other measurement: Frequency measurement
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
Figure 213: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
152 REF615
Application Manual
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
Figure 215: Other measurement: Load record profile
B1 O X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
REF615 153
Application Manual
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
Figure 218: Default binary outputs - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
154 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
B2 RESET
B3
B5
B6
LED3
OR
OK
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
REF615 155
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM B1 O ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM B2 RESET
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH B3
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

The operate logics are connected to minimum pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the
minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to
the binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
EFPADM_OPERATE B6

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,
high -impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices
156 REF615
Application Manual
MDSOPT and different types of timers and control functions. These functions are
not included in application configuration but they can be added based on the
system requirements.
3.8 Standard configuration F
3.8.1 Applications
The standard configuration includes directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection with phase voltage based measurement, undervoltage and
overvoltage protection and measurement function. The configuration is mainly
intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in directly or resistance
earthed distribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options
for selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-
based principles.
REF615 157
Application Manual
3.8.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
F

Master Trip Master Trip
Configuration A
System
Lockout relay Lockout relay

HMI
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86
A
I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
U12 0. 0 kV
O R
L - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
2×
IL2 0 A
- User management
46 46PD 49F 50P/51P I
AND
ESC Clear
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I2f> 3I
Protocols:
67-1 67-2 68 IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
FUSEF CBCM Modbus®
60 CBCM IEC 60870-5-103
UL1UL2UL3 DNP3
Interfaces:
Io 2× Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Io>> MCS 3I OPTS TCS Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
51N-2 MCS 3I OPTM TCM RS-485, RS-232
HSR
Io PRP
RSTP
Io
2×
Uo - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f

DC 2 3
ES 1 2
1)
from technical documentation Current transformer 4

2)
3×
Uo> 3)
59G primary object
1)
UL1UL2UL3 3× 3×
3U< U2> U1< 3U> O→I
27 47O- 47U+ 59 79
REMARKS
18× Optional 3× No. of Calculated OR Alternative
MAP SOTF function instances value function to be
MAP SOTF Io/Uo defined when
2xRTD ordering
1xmA
Figure 222: Functionality overview for standard configuration F
158 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI1 MCB open

X110-SO4 Voltage protection operate alarm
LED Description
1 Overcurrent protection operated
2 Earth-fault protection operated
REF615 159
Application Manual
LED Description
3 Voltage protection operated
ed
9 Supervision alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
1 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
3 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
EFPADM1 - start
WPWDE1 - start
160 REF615
Application Manual

mode
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
WPWDE3 - start
14 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
17 PSPTUV1 - trret Positive or Rising
18 NSPTOV1 - trbu Positive or Rising
19 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
REF615 161
Application Manual

mode
35 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
36 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV2 - operate

162 REF615
Application Manual

The functional diagrams describe protection functionality of the IEDs in detail and
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-
directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 can be blocked
by energizing the binary input X120: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
Figure 223: Overcurrent protection function
DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHHPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK OPERATE DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
ENA_MULT START DPHLPDOC1_START
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
NON_DIR
OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B2
B4
B5
B6
Figure 224: Directional overcurrent protection function
The upstream blocking from the start of the second low stage of three-phase
directional overcurrent protection DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output
REF615 163
Application Manual
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect
the feeder against phase unbalance. Both the negative sequence overcurrent
protections are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
fault protection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC.
A dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF is used either for transient-based earth-
fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.
The binary input X110:BI2 is intended for controlling directional earth-fault
protection blocks' relay characteristic angle ( RCA: 0°, -90°) or operation mode
(IoSinφ, IoCosφ) change. The same input is also available for wattmetric protection.
164 REF615
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
DEFLPDEF2
DEFHPDEF1
OR6
B4
B5
B6
INTRPTEF1
BLK_EF
REF615 165
Application Manual
WPWDE1
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

current originating from the phase currents. The function is blocked in case of
detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
166 REF615
Application Manual
EFHPTOC1
Figure 232: Earth-fault protection function

normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The
function is blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of voltage
transformer.
PDNSPTOC1
Figure 233: Phase discontinuity protection function

T1PTTR1
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker-failure
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 POSCLOSE TRRET CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
Three arc protection stages ARCSARC1...3 are included as an optional function.

REF615 167
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5

168 REF615
Application Manual

from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas
DARREC1
OR6 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV

offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. Positive-sequence
undervoltage protection PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage protection
NSPTOV enable voltage-based unbalance protection. A failure in the voltage
measuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function. The activation is
connected to block undervoltage protection functions and voltage based unbalance
protection functions to avoid faulty tripping.
REF615 169
Application Manual
PHPTOV1
BLOCK OPERATE PHPTOV1_OPERATE
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 238: Overvoltage protection function
PHPTUV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PHPTUV1_OPERATE
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 239: Undervoltage protection function

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example,
170 REF615
Application Manual

functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
NSPTOV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE
START NSPTOV1_START
Figure 241: Negative-sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U BLOCK OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE
START PSPTUV1_START
Figure 242: Positive-sequence undervoltage protection function
from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
If a new protection function block to the configuration is added, check
the activation logic and add the connections.
REF615 171
Application Manual
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC1_START B1 O B1 O
DPHLPDOC2_START B2 B2
DPHHPDOC1_START B3 B3
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
OR6 OR6 OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START B1 O DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
DEFLPDEF2_START B2 DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2
DEFHPDEF1_START B3 DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
INTRPTEF1_START B4 NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
EFHPTOC1_START B5 NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5 B5
PDNSPTOC1_START B6 PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2 DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_START B4 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_START B5 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_START B6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B1 O EFPADM1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B2 EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
B6 ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6 OR6
EFPADM1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O
EFPADM2_START B2 PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE1_START B4 NSPTOV1_OPERATE B4
WPWDE2_START B5 PSPTUV1_OPERATE B5
WPWDE3_START B6 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
push button.
172 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B2 B2 RST_LKOUT
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B3
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B4 B4
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 173
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

The disturbance recorder main application sheet contains the
disturbance recorder function block and the connections to variables.
Once the order of signals connected to binary inputs of RDRE is changed,

make the changes to the parameter setting tool.
174 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
EFPADM1_START B2
WPWDE1_START B3
B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O OR6 NSPTOC2_START C6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 C7
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O C8
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 EFPADM2_START B2 C9
B5 WPWDE2_START B3 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B6 B4 EFHPTOC1_START C11
B5 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
B6 T1PTTR1_START C13
PHPTOV1_START C14
PHPTOV2_START C15
OR PHPTOV3_START C16
OR6 PSPTUV1_START C17
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O NSPTOV1_START C18
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_START C19
EFPADM3_START B2 PHPTUV2_START C20
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV3_START C21
OR6 B6 ROVPTOV3_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 OR C27
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4 B1 O C29
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B2 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C30
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C35
OR6 B4 C36
B5 C37
B1 O B6 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C38
WPWDE1_OPERATE B2 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C39
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3 CCSPVC1_FAIL C40
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4 X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING C41
B5 OR6 X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED C42
B6 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C43
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O C44
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 C45
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C46
OR6 B5 ARCSARC3_OPERATE C48
B6 DARREC1_INPRO C49
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 C53
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 C54
B6 OR6 C55
C56
OR B4 C60
B5 C61
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B1 O B6 C62
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL B2 C63
C64

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a failure
is detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that are
measuring the calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid
unnecessary operation.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
The fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 detects failures in the voltage measurement
circuits. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
SEQSPVC1
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED MINCB_OPEN

REF615 175
Application Manual
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
176 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 255: Earth-switch control logic
logics, gas pressure alarm and the circuit breaker spring charging status.
REF615 177
Application Manual
CBXCBR1
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Figure 256: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 257: Signal for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 258: Signal for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
AND6
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
NOT
Connect the higher-priority conditions before enabling the closing of

circuit breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed using bypass
feature of the function.
178 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 260: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic
The configuration includes the logic for generating the circuit breaker external
closing and opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

residual current.
phase voltage measurement VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130
card in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the
residual voltage.
REF615 179
Application Manual
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
Figure 266: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage current
VSMSQI1
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
180 REF615
Application Manual
B1 O X110_BI1_MCB_OPENED
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
REF615 181
Application Manual
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
182 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OR
OK
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6
LED3
OR6
OK
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
REF615 183
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVC1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

The configuration also includes overcurrent operate, earth-fault operate and
voltage operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimum pulse timer
TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC is connected to the binary outputs.
184 REF615
Application Manual
OR TPGAPC2
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2 EF_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFPADM_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
OR6 TPGAPC3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
PHPTUV_OPERATE B3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
Figure 278: Timer logic for voltage operate pulse

The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, high impedance fault detection function PHIZ, runtime counter MDSOPT
and different types of timers and control functions. These functions are not
included in application configuration but they can be added based on the system
requirements.
3.9 Standard configuration G
3.9.1 Applications
The standard configuration includes directional overcurrent and directional earth-
fault protection, undervoltage and overvoltage protection, frequency protection
and measurement function. The configuration is mainly intended for cable
and overhead-line feeder applications in direct or resistance-earthed distributed
networks. The configuration also includes additional options for selecting earth-
fault protection based on admittance and wattmetric principles.
REF615 185
Application Manual
3.9.2 Functions

CONFIGURATION
G
IEC 61850-9-2LE

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I
- Self-supervision
ESC Clear
U12 0. 0 kV
O R
SNTP, IRIG-B
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
2×
IL2 0 A
- User management
AND
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I2f> 3I
Protocols:
67-1 67-2 68
IEC 61850-8-1
FUSEF CBCM IEC 61850-9-2LE
UL1UL2UL3 60 CBCM Modbus®
UL1UL2UL3 IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Io 2× Interfaces:
Io>> MCS 3I OPTS TCS Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
51N-2 MCS 3I OPTM TCM Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
Io HSR
PRP
Io RSTP
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ PHIZ
67N-1 67N-2 HIZ
3× 3×
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
Yo>→ Po>→ Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
21YN 32N
OR - Symmetrical components
DC 2 3
ES 1 2
1)
3× from technical documentation Current sensor 3

Uo> 2)
59G primary object Voltage sensor 3
Uo 3)
UL1UL2UL3
primary object
1)
Combi sensor inputs with conventional
3× 3× Io input
3U< U2> U1< 3U> SYNC O→I
27 47O- 47U+ 59 25 79
UL1
REMARKS
ordering
Figure 279: Functionality overview for standard configuration G
186 REF615
Application Manual



LED Description
3 Voltage protection operated
ed
REF615 187
Application Manual
LED Description
9 Supervision alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 U1
6 U2
7 U3
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
EFPADM1 - start
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
WPWDE3 - start
188 REF615
Application Manual

mode
16 PSPTUV1 - trret Positive or Rising
17 NSPTOV1 - trbu Positive or Rising
PHHPTOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
REF615 189
Application Manual

mode
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV2 - operate
42 ARCSARC1 - operate Level trigger off
46 DARREC1 - close CB Positive or Rising
47 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Positive or Rising

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors.
The residual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected
CTs, an external core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from Combi sensors. The residual
voltage is calculated internally.

The functional diagrams describe the protection functionality of the IEDs in detail
and according to the factory set default connections.
190 REF615
Application Manual
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC.
PHIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
NON_DIR
OR6
B4
B5
B6
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 191
Application Manual
INRPHAR1

are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of sensor.
NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
fault protection WPWDE.
192 REF615
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
RCA_CTL
OR6
B4
B5
B6
WPWDE1
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 193
Application Manual
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

current originating from the phase currents. Function is blocked in case of
detection of a failure in secondary circuit of sensor.
EFHPTOC1

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The function
is blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of sensor.
PDNSPTOC1

194 REF615
Application Manual
T1PTTR1
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B6
ARCSARC3_OPERATE
X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED

REF615 195
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
RST_LKOUT

196 REF615
Application Manual
Set parameters for the DARREC1 function.
DARREC1
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

measuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is
REF615 197
Application Manual
PHPTOV1
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
PHPTUV1
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

198 REF615
Application Manual

functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 296: Residual overvoltage protection function
NSPTOV1
START NSPTOV1_START
Figure 297: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1
START PSPTUV1_START
Figure 298: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function
If a new protection function block to the configuration is added, check
the activation logic and also add the connections.
REF615 199
Application Manual
OR6 OR6
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
OR6 OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
PSPTUV1_START B4 B4
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input has been assigned
to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push
button.
200 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 201
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
B1 O
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6


202 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
EFPADM1_START B2
B3
B4
B5
B6 RDRE1
OR6 DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
DPHLPDOC2_START C2
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DPHHPDOC1_START C3
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 NSPTOC1_START C5
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C6
B5 EFPADM2_START B2 C7
B6 WPWDE2_START B3 C8
B4 C9
B5 EFHPTOC1_START C10
T1PTTR1_START C12
OR PHPTOV1_START C13
PHPTOV2_START C14
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTOV3_START C15
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 OR6 PSPTUV1_START C16
NSPTOV1_START C17
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PHPTUV1_START C18
EFPADM3_START B2 PHPTUV2_START C19
WPWDE3_START B3 PHPTUV3_START C20
OR6 B5 ROVPTOV2_START C22
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRRET C24
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C25
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 OR C26
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5 B1 O C28
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6 B2 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C29
OR6 PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE C30
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C31
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O T1PTTR1_OPERATE C32
OR6 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 C34
B4 C35
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O B5 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C36
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2 B6 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C37
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3 CCSPVC1_FAIL C38
B4 X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED C39
B5 X110_BI2_CB_OPENED C40
B6 C41
OR6 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C42
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC3_OPERATE C44
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_INPRO C45
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C46
B4 DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL C47
B5 C48
B6 C49
C50
OR6 C51
C52
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 OR6 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 C57
B6 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C58
B4 C61
B5 C62
B6 C63
C64

Failures in the current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a failure
is detected, it can be used to block current protection functions that measure the
operation.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
circuits.
SEQSPVC1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN

REF615 203
Application Manual
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Figure 305: Circuit-breaker conditioning monitoring function
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
204 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type and DCXSWI1...2 and ESXSWI1
are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in a standard
configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch status
DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 311: Earth switch control logic
input can be activated using the configuration logic, which is a combination of the
disconnector or breaker truck and the earth-switch position status, status of the
trip logics, gas pressure alarm and circuit breaker spring charging status.
is definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
REF615 205
Application Manual
CBXCBR1
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
AND6
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
NOT

206 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

measurement function CMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected to the
X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence current
measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence current and the residual current
measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current. Residual current input is
connected to the X130 card in the back panel.
phase voltage measurement VMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected
to the X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence
voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the residual
voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
REF615 207
Application Manual
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
VSMSQI1
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
208 REF615
Application Manual
B1 O X110_BI1_CB_CLOSED
B2
B1 O X110_BI2_CB_OPENED
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
REF615 209
Application Manual
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
Figure 329: Default binary output - X110
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
Figure 330: Default binary output - X100
210 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OR
OK
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
LED2
OR6
OK
WPWDE_OPERATE B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
LED3
OR6
OK
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
REF615 211
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVCF1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

voltage operate logic. The operate logics are connected to minimum pulse timer
TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC is connected to the binary outputs.
212 REF615
Application Manual
OR TPGAPC2
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFPADM_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B4
WPWDE_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6 TPGAPC3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_OPERATE_PULSE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
PHPTUV_OPERATE B3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
Figure 333: Timer logic for voltage operate pulse

high-impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices
3.10 Standard configuration H
3.10.1 Applications
earth-fault protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and
overvoltage protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly
intended for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in directly or resistance-
earthed distribution networks.
REF615 213
Application Manual
3.10.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
H

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A
I2> I2/I1> 3I>>> - Web HMI

46 46PD 50P/51P I ESC Clear
AND
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I> 3I>> 3I2f> 3I
Protocols:
51P-1 51P-2 68 IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®
60 CBCM MCS 3I IEC 60870-5-103
U12 Io DNP3
Interfaces:
Io Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Io
2× 2× RS-485, RS-232
Io>>> Io> Io>> PHIZ OPTS TCS Redundant protocols:
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HIZ OPTM TCM HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f

2 3 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
DC
- Symmetrical components
ES 1 2
1)

2)
3)
1)
UL1UL2UL3
primary object
UL1UL2UL3 3× 3× 3× 3×
3U< 3U> Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I
df/dt
27 59 59G 25 79
81
U12
Uo
REMARKS
2xRTD ordering
1xmA
Figure 334: Functionality overview for standard configuration H
214 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI1 Busbar VT secondary MCB open
X110-BI2 Line VT secondary MCB open

LED Description
REF615 215
Application Manual
LED Description
3 Combined protection operated indication
4 Synchronism or energizing check OK
5 Frequency protection
9 Supervision alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 U1B
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
216 REF615
Application Manual

mode
21 FRPFRQ1 - start Positive or Rising
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
EFLPTOC2 - operate
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFIPTOC1 - operate
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
35 FRPFRQ1 - operate Level trigger off
FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate
REF615 217
Application Manual

mode
42 SECRSYN1 - sync inpro Level trigger off
43 SECRSYN1 - sync ok Level trigger off
44 SECRSYN1 - cl fail al Level trigger off
45 SECRSYN1 - cmd fail al Level trigger off


218 REF615
Application Manual

X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHHPTOC2
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 219
Application Manual
INRPHAR1

are blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. One stage is
dedicated to sensitive earth-fault protection.
220 REF615
Application Manual
EFIPTOC1
EFHPTOC1
EFLPTOC1
EFLPTOC2
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6

three-phase load supply. For example, in downed conductor situations the function
is blocked in case of detection of a failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
PDNSPTOC1
REF615 221
Application Manual
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
OR6
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

and TRPPTRC2. If the IED has been ordered with high speed binary outputs,
the individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to dedicated trip
logic TRPPTRC3..5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at high speed outputs
222 REF615
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed using
the CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
REF615 223
Application Manual
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B5 OR
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B5
B6
Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offer
protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. A failure in the voltage
connected to block undervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty tripping.
224 REF615
Application Manual
PHPTOV1
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
PHPTUV1
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 225
Application Manual
The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth fault protection by

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
non-selective backup protection for the earth-fault functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
The selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection FRPFRQ prevents

damage to network components under unwanted frequency conditions. The
function also contains a selectable rate of change of the frequency (gradient)
protection to detect an increase or decrease in the fast power system frequency
at an early stage. This can be used as an early indication of a disturbance in the
system.
226 REF615
Application Manual
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O FREQUENCY_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 347: Frequency protection function
REF615 227
Application Manual
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O B1 O
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
OR6
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O
EFLPTOC2_START B2
EFHPTOC1_START B3
EFIPTOC1_START B4 OR6 OR6
PDNSPTOC1_START B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2
PHPTOV3_START B3 OR6
PHPTUV1_START B4
PHPTUV2_START B5 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
PHPTUV3_START B6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ROVPTOV1_START B1 O
ROVPTOV2_START B2
ROVPTOV3_START B3 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B4
FRPFRQ2_START B5 EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ3_START B6 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
push button.
228 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 229
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B4
B5
B6

230 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
OR PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHHPTOC2_START C3
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
OR6 EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFLPTOC2_START C8
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFHPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2 EFIPTOC1_START C10
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 PDNSPTOC1_START C11
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 PHPTOV1_START C12
B5 PHPTOV2_START C13
PHPTUV1_START C15
PHPTUV2_START C16
PHPTUV3_START C17
ROVPTOV1_START C18
OR6 ROVPTOV2_START C19
ROVPTOV3_START C20
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O FRPFRQ1_START C21
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 FRPFRQ2_START C22
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3 FRPFRQ3_START C23
B4 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C24
B5 CCBRBRF1_TRBU C25
B6 C26
C27
C28
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C29
OR6 INRPHAR1_BLK2H C31
C32
B4 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C36
B5 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C37
B6 CCSPVC1_FAIL C38
SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C42
OR6 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C43
SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C44
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C45
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 ARCSARC1_OPERATE C47
C53
C54
OR6 C55
C56
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O C57
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2 C58
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
C63
C64
OR6
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O
ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2
B4
B5
B6

Failures in the current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a
failure is detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that
measure the calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid
unnecessary operation.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
SEQSPVC1
DISCON_OPEN
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN MINCB_OPEN
REF615 231
Application Manual

SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Figure 354: Circuit-breaker conditioning monitoring function
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
232 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

The main purpose of the synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN is to provide
control over the closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the
closing, if the conditions for synchronism are not detected. The energizing function
allows closing, for example, when one side of the breaker is dead.
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to the set
conditions. When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output
SYNC_OK is activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The
SYNC_OK output signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of CBXCBR
through control logic. The function is block in case of line side or bus side MCB is
open.
SECRSYN1
BLOCK_SECRSYN1 BLOCK SYNC_INPRO SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO
CL_COMMAND SYNC_OK SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK
BYPASS CL_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL
CMD_FAIL_AL SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN B1 O BLOCK_SECRSYN1
X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN B2
Figure 359: Synchrocheck function
REF615 233
Application Manual
DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
logics, gas pressure alarm, circuit-breaker spring charging and synchronizing ok
status.
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
CBXCBR1
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
234 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
AND6
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
B4
B5
NOT B6
NOT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

REF615 235
Application Manual
residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage and single phase line side phase voltage
inputs to the IED are measured by three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 and
VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel. The
sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the
residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residual voltage.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
VSMSQI1
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
236 REF615
Application Manual
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
Figure 376: Other measurement: Three phase power and energy measurement
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
REF615 237
Application Manual
B1 O X110_BI1_BUS_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
B1 O X110_BI2_LINE_VT_MCB_OPEN
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
238 REF615
Application Manual
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
REF615 239
Application Manual
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OR
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
LED3
OR6
OK
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
AND
OK
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED B1 O ALARM
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2 RESET
LED5
OK
FREQUENCY_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
240 REF615
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVC1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

combined voltage and frequency operate logic. The operate logics are connected
to the minimum pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the
outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to the binary outputs.
REF615 241
Application Manual
TPGAPC2
OR
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
PHPTUV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
FREQUENCY_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 385: Timer logic for voltage and frequency operate pulse

3.11 Standard configuration J
3.11.1 Applications
The standard configuration for directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltage
protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly intended
for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed
distribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options for
selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-
based principles.
242 REF615
Application Manual
3.11.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
J

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
IL2 0 A

AND
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

2× AND SUPERVISION
3I>→ 3I>>→ 3I2f> 3I
Protocols:
67-1 67-2 68 IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
FUSEF CBCM Modbus®
60 CBCM IEC 60870-5-103
UL1UL2UL3 DNP3
U12 Interfaces:
Io 2× Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Io>> MCS 3I OPTS TCS Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
51N-2 MCS 3I OPTM TCM RS-485, RS-232
HSR
Io
PRP
RSTP
Io
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF
Uo - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f

DC 2 3
ES 1 2
1)

2)
3× 3×
3)
primary object
1)
3U< U2> U1< 3U>
27 47O- 47U+ 59
UL1UL2UL3
3× 3×
Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
UL1UL2UL3 59G
df/dt
25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
81
U12
PQUUB
PQVUB
18×
MAP SOTF
MAP SOTF
2xRTD REMARKS
1xmA
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 386: Functionality overview for standard configuration J
REF615 243
Application Manual



LED Description
1 Overcurrent protection operate
2 Earth-fault protection operate
244 REF615
Application Manual
LED Description
3 Combined protection operated indication
4 Synchronism or energizing check OK
8 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
9 Circuit supervision alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 U1B
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
9 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
REF615 245
Application Manual

mode
17 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
246 REF615
Application Manual

mode
41 X120 BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
42 X120 BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
43 X120 BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate
58 - 64 - -

REF615 247
Application Manual

Three of these include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-
by energizing the binary input X120:BI1.
PHIPTOC1
DPHHPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
NON_DIR
OR6
B4
B5
B6
248 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
with admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-
In addition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-
based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in
compensated networks.
REF615 249
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
RCA_CTL
OR6
B4
B5
B6
INTRPTEF1
BLK_EF
250 REF615
Application Manual
WPWDE1
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

current originating from the phase currents.
REF615 251
Application Manual
EFHPTOC1

three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1

T1PTTR1
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

individual operate signals from ARCSARC1...3 are connected to the dedicated trip
252 REF615
Application Manual
logic TRPPTRC3..5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at high speed outputs

ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5
Figure 400: ARC protection with dedicated HSO

REF615 253
Application Manual
DARREC1
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
EFPADM3_OPERATE B2 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK SYNC
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

254 REF615
Application Manual
PHPTOV1
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
PHPTUV1
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

REF615 255
Application Manual

functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
NSPTOV1
START NSPTOV1_START
Figure 405: Negative-sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1
START PSPTUV1_START
Figure 406: Positive-sequence undervoltage protection function
The selectable under-frequency or over-frequency protection FRPFRQ prevents

system.
256 REF615
Application Manual
FRPFRQ1
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 257
Application Manual
OR6 OR6
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
OR6 OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
B6 B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
push button.
258 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B5
B6
REF615 259
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6

selected signals from the different functions and the few binary inputs are also

260 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6 RDRE1
DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
OR6 PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O NSPTOC2_START C6
OR6 B2 C7
B3 C8
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B4 C9
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 B5 INTRPTEF1_START C10
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 B6 EFHPTOC1_START C11
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 PDNSPTOC1_START C12
B5 T1PTTR1_START C13
OR6 PHPTOV2_START C15
PHPTOV3_START C16
DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O PSPTUV1_START C17
B2 NSPTOV1_START C18
OR B3 PHPTUV1_START C19
B4 PHPTUV2_START C20
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B5 PHPTUV3_START C21
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 B6 ROVPTOV1_START C22
ROVPTOV2_START C23
ROVPTOV3_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
OR6 OR C27
C28
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O C29
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 B2 INTRPTEF1_OPERATE C30
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
B5 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
B6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
B4 C36
B5 C37
B6 SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C38
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C39
CCSPVC1_FAIL C40
OR6 X120_BI3_CB_OPENED C43
C44
B6 FRPFRQ1_START C50
OR6 FRPFRQ2_START C51
FRPFRQ3_START C52
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2 SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C54
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 OR6 SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C57
B6 ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C58
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
OR C63
C64
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure the
calculated sequence component currents to avoid unnecessary operation. However,
it is not connected in the configuration.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
SEQSPVC1
DISCON_OPEN
REF615 261
Application Manual

SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
signal.
262 REF615
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6
Figure 418: Logic for blocking trip circuit supervision

closing, if conditions for synchronism are not detected. The energizing function
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to set conditions.
When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output SYNC_OK is
activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The SYNC_OK output
signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of CBXCBR through control
logic. The function is blocked in case if line side or bus side MCB is open.
SECRSYN1
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
REF615 263
Application Manual
DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
status.
definitely either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
CBXCBR1
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
264 REF615
Application Manual
Connect the additional signals by the application for closing of circuit

breaker.
AND6
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
NOT B4
B5
TRPPTRC1_TRIP IN OUT B6
NOT
NOT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2

OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Connect additional signals for closing and opening of circuit breaker in

local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
REF615 265
Application Manual
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

residual current.
The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation
that is sage and swells can be measured by the voltage variation function PHQVVR1.
By default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.
Depending on the application, the needed logic connections can be made by
PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
266 REF615
Application Manual
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
VSMSQI1
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
REF615 267
Application Manual
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
268 REF615
Application Manual
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
The LED main application sheet contains programmable LED function

blocks with initialization logic. If any LED function block is missing, insert
it from the object library.
REF615 269
Application Manual
LED1
OR
OK
LED2
OR6
OK
B2 RESET
B3
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B4
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B6
LED3
OR6 OR
OK
NSPTOC_OPERATE B1 O B1 O ALARM
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B6
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
LED4
AND
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
270 REF615
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVC1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET
Figure 444: Default LED connections

REF615 271
Application Manual
OR TPGAPC2
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFPADM_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
PHPTOV_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
B6

runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different types of timers
and control functions. These functions are not included in application configuration
3.12 Standard configuration K
3.12.1 Applications
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, high-impendance restricted
earth-fault protection, undervoltage and overvoltage protection, frequency
protection and measurement functions is mainly intended for cable and overhead-
line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed distribution networks. The
configuration also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection
based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-based principles.
272 REF615
Application Manual
3.12.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
K

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I
- Self-supervision
ESC Clear
U12 0. 0 kV
O R
SNTP, IRIG-B
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
2×
IL2 0 A
- User management
I2> 3Ith>F 3I>>> - Web HMI
46 49F 50P/51P I ESC Clear
AND
3I
O R
L
OR
3× 3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF

AND SUPERVISION
3I> 3I>> 3I>→ 3I>>→ Protocols:
51P-1 51P-2 67-1 67-2 IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
3I Io
Modbus®
U12 IEC 60870-5-103
3I2f> FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I DNP3
68 60 CBCM MCS 3I Interfaces:
2× RS-485, RS-232
OPTS TCS Redundant protocols:
OPTM TCM HSR
Io PRP
RSTP
Io Io>>>
50N/51N
2×
Iob - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
Io> Io>> Io>→ Io>>→ Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
51N-1 51N-2 67N-1 67N-2
2 3 - Symmetrical components
DC
ES 1 2
Analog interface types 1)
dIoHi> 1)
87NH from technical documentation Current transformer 5
2)
Uo primary object Voltage transformer 5
3)
UL1UL2UL3
primary object
1)
2× 2× 2× 3×
3U< 3U> Uo> f>/f<, SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
df/dt
27 59 59G 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
81
U12
PQUUB
PQVUB
18×
FLOC MAP SOTF
21FL MAP SOTF
REMARKS
Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 447: Functionality overview for standard configuration K
REF615 273
Application Manual
3.12.2.1 Default IO connections


X130-BI2 Circuit breaker closed position indication
X130-BI3 Circuit breaker open position indication

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip coil 2 or EFLPTOC2 operated
X110-SO1 –
X110-SO4 Voltage or frequency protection operate alarm
LED Description
1 Overcurrent protection operate
2 Earth-fault protection operate
274 REF615
Application Manual
LED Description
3 Combined protection operation indication
4 Synchronism or energizing check Ok
5 Frequency protection operated
6 Circuit breaker failure protection operated
8 High impedance restricted earth-fault protection operated
9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring or supervision alarm

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 IoB
6 Uo
7 U1
8 U2
9 U3
10 U1B
11 –
12 –

mode
REF615 275
Application Manual

mode
13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
24 HREFPDIF1 - start Positive or Rising
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
28 DPHLPDOC1 - operate Level trigger off
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
EFLPTOC2 - operate
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFIPTOC1 - operate
31 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
DEFHPDEF1 - operate
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTUV2 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate
276 REF615
Application Manual

mode


The functional diagrams describe the protection functionality of the IEDs in detail
and according to the factory set default connections.
REF615 277
Application Manual
Five overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Two of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-
by energizing the binary input X130: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHLPTOC1
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
DPHHPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
NON_DIR
OR
INRPHAR1
278 REF615
Application Manual

provided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect
the feeder against phase unbalance. Both the negative sequence overcurrent
protections are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Six stages are provided for earth-fault protection. Two stages are dedicated
for directional earth-fault protection. Apart from these earth-fault protection
functions, configuration also includes a dedicated high impedance restricted earth-
fault protection function.
REF615 279
Application Manual
EFIPTOC1
EFHPTOC1
EFLPTOC1
EFLPTOC2
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
DEFHPDEF1
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF1
RCA_CTL
OR
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
HREFPDIF1
BLOCK OPERATE HREFPDIF1_OPERATE
START HREFPDIF1_START
Figure 454: High impedance restricted earth-fault protection function
280 REF615
Application Manual

T1PTTR1
TEMP_AMB ALARM
Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 provides impedance-based fault location. Function is

triggered by operation of non-directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection
function. However the outputs of fault locator are not connected to any logic and
those needs to be connected as per application need.
SCEFRFLO1
OR6 OR
BLOCK ALARM
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O TRIGG
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2 B2 TRIGG_XC0F
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B5
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
Figure 456: Fault locator function
REF615 281
Application Manual
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B5
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED

logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at high speed outputs
282 REF615
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the I NHIBIT_RECL input. By
REF615 283
Application Manual
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosure sequence is expressed with the
DARREC1
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
Two overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offer
protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. A failure in the voltage
connected to block undervoltage protection functions to avoid faulty tripping.
DARREC1
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
284 REF615
Application Manual
PHPTUV1
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
Grouped function operate
OR
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2

detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the earth-fault functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

system.
REF615 285
Application Manual
FRPFRQ1
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
output from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
286 REF615
Application Manual
OR6 OR6 TPGAPC1

T1PTTR1_START B6 B6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_START B1 O
EFLPTOC2_START B2
EFHPTOC1_START B3
EFIPTOC1_START B4 OR6 OR6
DEFHPDEF1_START B5
DEFLPDEF1_START B6 PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B6 B6
OR6
PHPTOV1_START B1 O
PHPTOV2_START B2
PHPTUV1_START B3 OR6
PHPTUV2_START B4
ROVPTOV1_START B5 PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O
ROVPTOV2_START B6 PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 OR6
HREFPDIF1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5 EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC2_START B6 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4
OR6
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
push button.
REF615 287
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B3
B5
B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
288 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
B6 B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B5
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B6
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B4
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B5
B6

REF615 289
Application Manual
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4 RDRE1
B5
B6 PHLPTOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHIPTOC1_START C3
DPHLPDOC1_START C4
DPHHPDOC1_START C5
OR NSPTOC1_START C6
NSPTOC2_START C7
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B1 O EFLPTOC1_START C8
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 EFLPTOC2_START C9
EFHPTOC1_START C10
OR EFIPTOC1_START C11
DEFLPDEF1_START C12
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DEFHPDEF1_START C13
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_START C14
PHPTOV1_START C15
PHPTUV1_START C17
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O PHPTUV2_START C18
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2 ROVPTOV1_START C19
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B3 ROVPTOV2_START C20
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B4 FRPFRQ1_START C21
OR HREFPDIF1_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
C28
OR C29
C30
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O C31
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C32
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
C34
C35
C36
OR C37
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C38
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U C39
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2 CCSPVC1_FAIL C40
SECRSYN1_SYNC_INPRO C44
OR SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK C45
SECRSYN1_CL_FAIL_AL C46
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O SECRSYN1_CMD_FAIL_AL C47
DARREC1_INPRO C52
OR6 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C53
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B1 O C55
B4 C58
B5 C59
B6 C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
OR6
ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O
B4
B5
B6

Failures in current measuring circuits are detected by CCSPVC1. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block current protection functions that measure the
operation.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
circuits at bus side. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
SEQSPVC1
DISCON_OPEN

290 REF615
Application Manual
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
REF615 291
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

closing if conditions for synchronism are not detected. The energizing function
SECRSYN measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to set conditions.
When all the measured quantities are within set limits, the output SYNC_OK is
activated for allowing closing or closing the circuit breaker. The SYNC_OK output
signal of SECRSYN is connected to ENA_CLOSE input of CBXCBR through control
logic. The function is blocked in case of line side or bus side MCB is open.
SECRSYN1
LLDB
LLLB
DLLB
DLDB
OR
292 REF615
Application Manual
DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 478: Earthing switch control logic
status.
CBXCBR1
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Connect the addition signals required by the application for closing and
opening coil of circuit breaker.
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 480: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
REF615 293
Application Manual
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
Figure 481: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the closing of circuit

breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed using bypass feature of
the function.
AND6
SECRSYN1_SYNC_OK B2
B3
NOT B4
B5
NOT
NOT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
opening command with IED in local or remote mode.
Connect the additional signals for opening and closing of circuit breaker
in local or remote mode, if applicable for the configuration.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
294 REF615
Application Manual
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

residual current.
The current input to high impedance restricted earth fault protection function is
measured by RESCMMXU2.
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation,
that is, sage and swells can be measured by the voltage variation function
PHQVVR1. By default these power quality functions are not included in the
configuration. The required logic connections can be made depending on the
application using PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
REF615 295
Application Manual
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
RESCMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
VSMSQI1
RESVMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
Figure 495: Other measurement: Three phase power and energy measurement
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
296 REF615
Application Manual
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
Figure 498: Binary input - X110 terminal block
REF615 297
Application Manual
X130_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X130_BI3_CB_OPENED
Figure 499: Binary input - X130 terminal block
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
X110 (BIO).X110-SO4
Figure 500: Binary output - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
OR
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B1 O
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
Figure 501: Binary output - X100 terminal block
298 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OR
OK
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED2
OR6
OK
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
LED3
OR6
OK
T1PTTR1_OPERATE B2 RESET
PHPTOV_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
LED4
AND
OK
LED5
OK
FREQUENCY_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
REF615 299
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
HREFPDIF1_OPERATE ALARM
RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPV1_ALARM B4
SSCBR1_ALARMS B5
B6
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

300 REF615
Application Manual
OR
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O
PHxPTOC_OPERATE B2
TPGAPC2
IN1 OUT1 OC_OPERATE_PULSE
OR6
EFxPTOC_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1 VOLTAGE_AND_FREQ_OPERATE_PULSE
B4
B5
B6

not included in application configuration but they can be based on the system
requirements.
3.13 Standard configuration L
3.13.1 Applications
protection with phase voltage-based measurements, undervoltage and overvoltage
protection, frequency protection and measurement functions is mainly intended
for cable and overhead-line feeder applications in isolated or resonant-earthed
distribution networks. The configuration also includes additional options for
selecting earth-fault protection based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic-
based principles.
Standard configuration L provides the highest functionality level of REF615
standard configurations supporting sensor inputs. Standard configuration L is
delivered preconfigured with directional overcurrent protection but it also supports
non-directional overcurrent protection as well as directional overpower. Depending
on the specific feeder application, the appropriate functionality can be selected and
an own configuration created with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.
Standard configuration L is not designed for using all the available functionality
REF615 301
Application Manual
content in one IED at the same time. To ensure the performance of the IED, the
user specific configuration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool
of PCM600.
3.13.2 Functions

CONFIGURATION
L
IEC 61850-9-2LE

Configuration A
System
Lockout relay
HMI
Lockout relay
Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I ESC Clear
- Self-supervision
A
O R
L
U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
- User management
IL2 0 A
2× - Web HMI
Q>→, 3U< P>/Q> I ESC Clear
AND
3I 32Q, 27 32R/32O
O R
L
OR
2×
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>>
46 46PD 49F 50P/51P
AND SUPERVISION
3× 3× 3I
ARC 3I>/Io>BF Protocols:
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF IEC 61850-8-1
FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I IEC 61850-9-2LE
60 CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®
2× 2× IEC 60870-5-103
3I> 3I>> 3I>→ 3I>>→ Io Io DNP3
51P-1 51P-2 67-1 67-2 2×
UL1UL2UL3 OPTS TCS Interfaces:
OPTM TCM Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Io RS-485, RS-232
3I2f> Io>>
68 51N-2 Redundant protocols:
HSR
PRP
RSTP
Io
2× CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
Io> Io>>>
51N-1 50N/51N - I, U, Io, P, Q, E, pf, f
2 3 - Symmetrical components
DC
2×
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→ Io>→Y ES 1 2 Analog interface types 1)
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF 67YN 1)
Current sensor 3
2)
Control and indication function for Voltage sensor 3
3× 3×
primary object
Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA 3)
Status indication function for Current transformer 1
21YN 32N 51NHA primary object 1)
Combi sensor inputs with conventional Io
OR OR input
PQM3I PQM3U PQMU

Uo PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
UL1UL2UL3
3× 3× 2× 2×
3U< U<RT U2> U1< SYNC O→I PQUUB
27 27RT 47O- 47U+ 25 79 PQVUB
UL1
3× 3× 6×
3U> Uo> VS f>/f<,
df/dt
59 59G 78V
81
REMARKS
FLOC MAP SOTF function instances value function to be
21FL MAP SOTF Io/Uo defined when
ordering
Figure 505: Functionality overview for standard configuration L
302 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI1 Circuit breaker plug not inserted
X110-BI2 Circuit breaker spring discharged

X100-PO1 Release for circuit breaker closing
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker close command
X100-SO1 Release for circuit breaker tuck
X100-SO2 Release for earthing switch
X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command
LED Description
1 Circuit breaker close enabled
2 Short circuit protection operated
4 Current unbalance protection operated
5 NPS or PPS voltage protection operated
6 Overvoltage or residual overvoltage protection operated
8 Undervoltage or frequency protection operated
9 Supervision alarm
11 –
REF615 303
Application Manual

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 U1
6 U2
7 U3
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
EFPADM1 - start
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM2 - start
WPWDE2 - start
WPWDE3 - start
304 REF615
Application Manual

mode
17 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
DEFLPDEF1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
WPWDE1 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV2 - operate
38 SEQSPVC - fusef3ph Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
REF615 305
Application Manual

mode
PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
48 DARREC1 - inpro Positive or Rising
49 FRPFRQ1 - start Level trigger off
52 FRPFRQ - operate Positive or Rising
FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors.
The residual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected
CTs, an external core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from Combi sensors. The residual
voltage is calculated internally.
306 REF615
Application Manual

Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC.
PHIPTOC1
BLOCK OPERATE PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC1
NON_DIR
DPHLPDOC2
NON_DIR
OR6
B4
B5
B6
Figure 507: Directional overcurrent protection functions
directional overcurrent protection DPHLPDOC2 is connected to the binary output.
This signal is not connected in the configuration. This output can be used for
sending a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection stage of the IED at
the infeeding bay.
OR6
DPHLPDOC2_START B1 O
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 307
Application Manual
INRPHAR1

NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
A dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF is used either for transient-based earth-
fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated
networks.
308 REF615
Application Manual
DEFLPDEF1
RCA_CTL
DEFLPDEF2
RCA_CTL
DEFHPDEF1
RCA_CTL
OR6
B4
B5
B6
INTRPTEF1
BLK_EF
WPWDE1
WPWDE2
WPWDE3
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 309
Application Manual
EFPADM1
EFPADM2
EFPADM3
OR6
EFPADM2_OPERATE B2
EFPADM3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

EFHPTOC1 protects from double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated
networks. The protection function uses the calculated residual current originating
from the phase currents.
EFHPTOC1

PDNSPTOC1

T1PTTR1
310 REF615
Application Manual
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary output
X100:PO4.
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
OR6
WPWDE2_OPERATE B3
WPWDE3_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

logic TRPPTRC3...5. The output of TRPPTRC3...5 is available at high speed outputs
REF615 311
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC4
RST_LKOUT
TRPPTRC5
RST_LKOUT

312 REF615
Application Manual
close command is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO2.
DARREC1
B5 DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
B6 DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD CB_READY
OR6 INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
OR6
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
ARCSARCx_OPERATE B6

REF615 313
Application Manual
PHPTOV1
START PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2
START PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3
START PHPTOV3_START
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
PHPTUV1
START PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2
START PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3
START PHPTUV3_START
OR6
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

314 REF615
Application Manual

functionality.
ROVPTOV1
ROVPTOV2
ROVPTOV3
OR6
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
NSPTOV1
START NSPTOV1_START
Figure 524: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1
START PSPTUV1_START
Figure 525: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

system.
REF615 315
Application Manual
FRPFRQ1
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ1_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ2
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ2_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
FRPFRQ3
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START FRPFRQ3_START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
General start and operate signals from all functions are connected to minimum
pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The
output from TPGAPC can be connected to binary outputs. However, these are not
connected in the configuration.
If a new protection function block is added to the configuration, check
the activation logic and add connections.
316 REF615
Application Manual
OR6 OR6
NSPTOC1_START B5 B5
NSPTOC2_START B6 B6
TPGAPC1
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
OR6 OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
OR6 OR6
FRPFRQ1_START B1 O PHPTOV2_OPERATE B1 O
FRPFRQ2_START B2 PHPTOV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_START B3 ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B3
B6 B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6
logics TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting.
If the lockout operation mode is required, the binary input has been assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
Three other trip logics TRPPTRC3..4 are also available if the IED is ordered with high
REF615 317
Application Manual
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
WPWDE1_OPERATE B1 O
WPWDE2_OPERATE B2
WPWDE3_OPERATE B3
ARCSARC1_OPERATE B4
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B5
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B5
B6
318 REF615
Application Manual
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM2_OPERATE B5
EFPADM3_OPERATE B6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE B4
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE B5
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B2
WPWDE1_OPERATE B3
WPWDE2_OPERATE B4
WPWDE3_OPERATE B5
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B4
PHPTUV2_OPERATE B5
PHPTUV3_OPERATE B6
OR6
PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2
PHPTOV3_OPERATE B3
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE B4
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B5
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B6

The START and OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
The disturbance recorder main application sheet contains disturbance
recorder function block and the connections to the variables.
Once the order of signals connected to the binary inputs of RDRE is

changed, make the changes to the parameter setting tool.
REF615 319
Application Manual
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5 RDRE1
B6
DPHLPDOC1_START C1 TRIGGERED
DPHLPDOC2_START C2
DPHHPDOC1_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
OR6 NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
DEFLPDEF2_START B1 O C7
B2 C8
B3 C9
B4 INTRPTEF1_START C10
B5 EFHPTOC1_START C11
T1PTTR1_START C13
PHPTOV2_START C15
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O OR6 PHPTOV3_START C16
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE B2 PSPTUV1_START C17
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE B3 DEFHPDEF1_START B1 O NSPTOV1_START C18
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE B4 B2 PHPTUV1_START C19
B5 B3 PHPTUV2_START C20
B6 B4 PHPTUV3_START C21
ROVPTOV3_START C24
CCBRBRF1_TRRET C25
OR CCBRBRF1_TRBU C26
C27
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C28
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 C29
OR6 EFHPTOC1_OPERATE C31
PHPTOV1_OPERATE B1 O INRPHAR1_BLK2H C33
OR6 OR PHPTOV2_OPERATE B2 T1PTTR1_OPERATE C34
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE B1 O B1 O B4 C36
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE B2 B2 B5 C37
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE B3 B6 SEQPVC1_FUSEF_3PH C38
B4 SEQPVC1_FUSEF_U C39
B5 CCSPVC1_FAIL C40
B6 X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED C41
OR6 C43
C44
PHPTUV1_OPERATE B1 O ARCSARC1_OPERATE C45
OR6 FRPFRQ3_START C51
C52
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE B3 OR6 C55
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4 C56
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5 ARCSARC1_ARC_FLT_DET B1 O C57
B6 ARCSARC2_ARC_FLT_DET B2 C58
B4 C60
B5 C61
B6 C62
OR C63
C64
OR6
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE B2
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

CCSPVC1 detects the failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure the
calculated sequence component currents to avoid unnecessary operation. However,
it is not connected in the configuration.
CCSPVC1
ALARM CCSPVC1_ALARM
SEQSPVC1
BLOCK FUSEF_3PH SEQPVC1_FUSEF_3PH
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED CB_CLOSED FUSEF_U SEQPVC1_FUSEF_U
DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN
320 REF615
Application Manual

SSCBR1
PRES_ALM_IN IPOW_ALM SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED SPR_CHR_ST CB_LIFE_ALM SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
CB_SPRING_CHARGED SPR_CHR MON_ALM SSCBR1_MON_ALM
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED IN OUT CB_SPRING_CHARGED
Figure 535: Logic for start of circuit-breaker spring charged
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the master trip, TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2, and the binary input X110:BI1
indicating IED plug out.
It is assumed that there is an external resistor in the circuit breaker
REF615 321
Application Manual
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6

information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
The configuration includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector and
earthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 and
X100:SO2.
DCSXSWI1
AND6
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS B1 O DC1_CLOSE_ENABLE
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 538: Disconnector interlocking logic
Connect the additional signals for the application for closing of earthing
switch.
322 REF615
Application Manual
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
OR6
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT B1 O ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 539: Earthing switch close enable logic
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether disconnector or breaker truck is
either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output, together
CBXCBR1
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 541: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
REF615 323
Application Manual
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 542: Circuit breaker control logic: Signal for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
AND6
CB_SPRING_CHARGED B1 O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
B2
NOT B3
B4
B6
NOT
AND
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS B1 O
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
TCSSCBR_ALARM

circuit breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass
OR6
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 544: Circuit breaker close blocking logic
Connect the additional signal for closing and opening of circuit breaker
in local or remote mode if applicable for the configuration.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
324 REF615
Application Manual
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2

measurement function CMMXU1. The three phase current input is connected to the
X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three phases. The sequence current
measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequence current and the residual current
measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residual current. Residual current input is
connected to the X130 card in the back panel.
phase voltage measurement VMMXU1. The three-phase current input is connected
to the X131, X132 and X133 card in the back panel for three-phases. The sequence
voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequence voltage and the residual
voltage measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the voltage current.
power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
PHQVVR1. By default, these power quality functions are not included in the
application by PCM600.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
REF615 325
Application Manual
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
VSMSQI1
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
326 REF615
Application Manual
B1 O X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
B2
B1 O X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
B2
B1 O X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
B2
B1 O X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
Figure 556: Default binary inputs - X110 terminal block
REF615 327
Application Manual
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DC1_CLOSE_ENABLE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
328 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OK
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD ALARM
RESET
LED2
OR
OK
LED3
OR6
OK
B1 O ALARM
B2 RESET
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE B3
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B5
B6
LED4
OR6
OK
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 RESET
B4
B5
B6
LED5
OR
OK
REF615 329
Application Manual
LED6
OR
OK
PHPTOV_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED7
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED8
OR
OK
PHPTUV_OPERATE B1 O ALARM
FRPFRQ_OPERATE B2 RESET
LED9
OR6
OK
SEQPVC1_FUSEF_3PH B2 RESET
SEQPVC1_FUSEF_U B3
CCSPVC1_ALARM B4
B5
B6
LED10
OR
OK
CB_OPEN_COMMAND B1 O ALARM
SSCBR1_ALARMS B2 RESET
Figure 559: Default LED connections

combined voltage & frequency operate logic. The operate logics are connected to
the minimum pulse timer TPGAPC for setting the minimum pulse length for the
outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected to binary outputs.
330 REF615
Application Manual
OR TPGAPC2
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B2 IN2 OUT2
OR6
ROVPTOV_OPERATE B2
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFPADM_OPERATE B5
WPWDE_OPERATE B6
OR6 TPGAPC3
PHPTOV_OPERATE B1 O IN1 OUT1
FRPFRQ_OPERATE B3
PSPTUV1_OPERATE B4
NSPTOV1_OPERATE B5
B6

runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different types of timers
and control functions and optional fault locator. These functions are not included in
application configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.
3.14 Standard configuration N
3.14.1 Applications
The standard configuration N provides the highest functionality level of all the
REF615 standard configurations. Standard configuration N is delivered as pre-
configured with the same configuration as standard configuration D. Standard
configuration N provides the possibility to standardize on one type of REF615.
Depending on the specific feeder application, the appropriate functionality can
be selected and an own configuration created with the Application Configuration
tool in PCM600. Standard configuration N is not designed to utilize at once all
the available functionality content in one IED. To ensure the performance of the
IED, the user specific configuration load needs to be verified with the Application
Configuration tool in PCM600.
REF615 331
Application Manual
3.14.2 Functions
UL1UL2UL3
Uo

CONFIGURATION
N

Configuration A
System
HMI
Lockout relay Lockout relay

Time
Authorization

94/86 94/86 I
- Self-supervision
ESC Clear
U12 0. 0 kV
O R
SNTP, IRIG-B
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
- User management
2× - Web HMI
Q>→, 3U< P>/Q> I ESC Clear
AND
3I 32Q, 27 32R/32O
O R
L
OR
3× 2×
I2> I2/I1> 3Ith>F 3I>>>
46 46PD 49F 50P/51P
Io AND SUPERVISION
3×
ARC 3I>/Io>BF Protocols:
50L/50NL 51BF/51NBF IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE
3I FUSEF CBCM MCS 3I Modbus®
60 CBCM MCS 3I Io IEC 60870-5-103
2× 2× DNP3
U12 3I> 3I>> 3I>→ 3I>>→ Interfaces:
51P-1 51P-2 67-1 67-2 * * * Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
MCS I_A MCS I_B MCS I_C
MCS I_A MCS I_B MCS I_C Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232
3I2f> Redundant protocols:
68 2× HSR
OPTS TCS PRP
OPTM TCM RSTP
Io
2×
Io>>> Io> Io>> PHIZ CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
50N/51N 51N-1 51N-2 HIZ
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3) - I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
CB 1 -
Uo - Load profile record
2× DC 2 3 - RTD/mA measurement (optional)
Io>→ Io>>→ Io>IEF→ Io>→Y - Symmetrical components
67N-1 67N-2 67NIEF 67YN ES 1 2
1)
3× 3× 2)
Control and indication function for Current transformer 4
Yo>→ Po>→ Io>HA primary object
21YN 32N 51NHA Voltage transformer 5
3)
OR OR primary object 1)
UL1UL2UL3
UL1UL2UL3
3× 3× 2× 2×
3U< U<RT U2> U1< SYNC O→I PQM3I PQM3U PQMU
27 27RT 47O- 47U+ 25 79 PQM3I PQM3V PQMV
U12
3× 3× 6×
3U> Uo> VS f>/f<, PQUUB
df/dt PQVUB
59 59G 78V
81
REMARKS
FLOC dHi_A> dHi_B> dHi_C>
Optional 3× No. of * Reserves the 3I inputs for the
21FL 87A 87B 87C
* * * function instances high-impedance based differential
purpose when this functionality is used
18×
MAP SOTF Alternative
OR
MAP SOTF Calculated function to be
2xRTD value defined when
1xmA Io/Uo
ordering
Figure 562: Functionality overview for standard configuration N
332 REF615
Application Manual


X110-BI2 Autoreclose external start command

LED Description
4 Negative sequence overcurrent or phase discontinuity
REF615 333
Application Manual
LED Description

Channel Description
1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 –
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
12 –

mode
11 – –
334 REF615
Application Manual

mode
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHLPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
NSPTOC2 - operate
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFIPTOC1 - operate
19 X110BI2 - ext start AutoReclose Level trigger off

REF615 335
Application Manual

Four non-directional overcurrent stage and three directional overcurrent stages are
offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Three-phase non-directional
overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by
energizing the binary input X120: BI1.
PHIPTOC1
PHHPTOC1
PHLPTOC1
PHLPTOC2
OR6
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B5
B6
non-directional overcurrent protection PHLPTOC2 is connected to the binary output
336 REF615
Application Manual
OR6
PHLPTOC2_START B1 O UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
INRPHAR1

NSPTOC1
NSPTOC2
OR
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2
Four non-directional earth-fault stages and three directional earth-fault stages are
offered earth-fault protection. However in the configuration three non-directional
earth fault stages are considered. One stage is dedicated to sensitive earth-fault
protection EFLPTOC2. According to the IED's order code, the directional earth-fault
protection method can be based on conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF
only or alternatively used together with admittance-based earth-fault protection
EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE or harmonics-based
earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. A dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF is used
either for transient based earth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault
protection in compensated networks.
REF615 337
Application Manual
EFIPTOC1
EFHPTOC1
EFLPTOC1
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
EFLPTOC2
Figure 568: Sensitive earth-fault protection function

PDNSPTOC1

the function can be used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_CLOSE
338 REF615
Application Manual
CCBRBRF1
OR6 OR6
BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3 CB_FAULT
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

TRPPTRC3...5. The outputs of TRPPTRC3...5 are available at high speed outputs
REF615 339
Application Manual
ARCSARC1
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC2
OPR_MODE
ARCSARC3
OPR_MODE
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC3
TRPPTRC4
TRPPTRC5

from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. The INIT_6
input in the autoreclosing function block is controlled by a binary input X110: BI2
enabling the use of the external autoreclosing start command. It is possible to
create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
340 REF615
Application Manual
close command is connected directly to the binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
OR6 RECL_ON
SYNC
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B2
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B3
CBXCBR1_SELECTED B4
B6
B1 O
B2
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
from TPGAPC1 is connected to binary outputs
OR6
PHLPTOC1_START B1 O
PHHPTOC1_START B2
PHLPTOC2_START B3
PHIPTOC1_START B4
NSPTOC1_START B5
NSPTOC2_START B6
OR6
OR6
B1 O
B6 IN1 OUT1 GENERAL_START_PULSE
OR6 OR6
PHLPTOC2_OPERATE B3 B3
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B4
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B5
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
REF615 341
Application Manual
push button.
TRPPTRC1
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE B2
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6
TRPPTRC2
OR6 OR6
OR6
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE B3
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B4
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE B5
CCBRBRF1_TRRET B6
OR6
ARCSARC2_OPERATE B2
ARCSARC3_OPERATE B3
B4
B5
B6

342 REF615
Application Manual
RDRE1
PHHPTOC1_START C2
PHLPTOC2_START C3
PHIPTOC1_START C4
NSPTOC1_START C5
NSPTOC2_START C6
EFLPTOC1_START C7
EFHPTOC1_START C8
EFIPTOC1_START C9
EFLPTOC2_START C10
C11
PDNSPTOC1_START C12
T1PTTR1_START C13
OR6 CCBRBRF1_TRRET C14
CCBRBRF1_TRBU C15
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O C16
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE B4 X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE C19
B5 EFLPTOC2_OPERATE C20
INRPHAR1_BLK2H C22
T1PTTR1_OPERATE C23
C24
OR ARCSARC2_OPERATE C26
NSPTOC1_OPERATE B1 O DARREC1_INPRO C28
NSPTOC2_OPERATE B2 DARREC1_CLOSE_CB C29
OR6 C34
C35
B4 C39
B5 C40
B6 C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
OR6 C46
C47
B4 C51
B5 C52
B6 C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
SSCBR1
RST_TRV_T OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
REF615 343
Application Manual
OR6
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM B4
SSCBR1_OPR_LO B5 OR
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM B6
B1 O SSCBR1_ALARMS
B2
OR6
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO B1 O
SSCBR1_MON_ALM B3
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM B4
SSCBR1_PRES_LO B5
B6
NOT
signal.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR properly.
TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR2
OR
TCSSCBR2_ALARM B2
OR6
TRPPTRC2_TRIP B2
B4
B5
B6
344 REF615
Application Manual

are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in the
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information are connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
ESSXSWI1
OKPOS
Figure 584: Earthing-switch control logic
is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output, together
CBXCBR1
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_OK CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
Connect the addition signals required for the application for closing and
opening of circuit breaker.
REF615 345
Application Manual
OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB B2
Figure 586: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker
OR6
TRPPTRC1_TRIP B2
DARREC1_OPEN_CB B3
B4
B5
B6
Figure 587: Circuit breaker control logic: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker
AND6
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS B2
B4
NOT B5
B6
NOT
NOT
Connect the additional signal for closing and opening of circuit breaker
in local or remote mode if applicable for the configuration.
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
AND
CONTROL_LOCAL B1 O
FALSE B2
OR
B2
AND
CONTROL_REMOTE B1 O
FALSE B2
346 REF615
Application Manual

residual current.
gives the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
PHQVVR1. By default, these power quality functions are not included in the
application by PCM600.
inputs to the IED can be measured by three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1
and VMMXU2. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card in the back panel. The
power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available.
However, these voltage, frequency and power measurement functions need to be
added in application configurations.
CMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
CSMSQI1
RESCMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
VMMXU1
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
REF615 347
Application Manual
VSMSQI1
Figure 595: Residual measurement: Residual voltage measurement
VMMXU2
BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
FMMXU1
PEMMXU1
RSTACM
FLTRFRC1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
LDPRLRC1
RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
348 REF615
Application Manual
B1 O X110_BI2_EXT_START_AUTORECLOSE
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
REF615 349
Application Manual
UPSTEAM_OC_BLOCKING
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
TRPPTRC3_TRIP
OC_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
TRPPTRC4_TRIP
EF_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
TRPPTRC5_TRIP
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
GENERAL_START_PULSE
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
350 REF615
Application Manual
LED1
OK
RESET
LED2
OK
RESET
LED3
OK
RESET
LED4
OR
OK
LED5
OK
T1PTTR1_ALARM ALARM
RESET
REF615 351
Application Manual
LED6
OK
CCBRBRF1_TRBU ALARM
RESET
LED7
OK
RESET
LED8
OK
SSCBR1_ALARMS ALARM
RESET
LED9
OK
TCSSCBR_ALARM ALARM
RESET
LED10
OK
RESET
LED11
OK
DARREC1_INPRO ALARM
RESET

The operate logics are connected to the minimum pulse timer TPGAPC for setting
the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from TPGAPC is connected
to binary outputs.
TPGAPC2
OR
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE B2
352 REF615
Application Manual

The configuration includes few instances of residual overvoltage protection,
phase overvoltage and undervoltage protection, positive-sequence undervoltage
protection, negative-sequence overvoltage protection, frequency protection,
multipurpose protection MAPGAPC, high-impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime
counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and different types of timers and
control functions. These functions are not included in application configuration but
they can be added based on the system requirements.
REF615 353
Application Manual
Requirements for measurement 1MRS756378 U
transformers
4 Requirements for measurement

transformers
4.1 Current transformers
4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent

protection
For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be
chosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may
endanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, when
the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be
enabled.
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual
CT burden. The protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in
accordance with the CT performance as well as other factors.
4.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer
of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For
protective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest
permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current
prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning
protection).
Table 71: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current trans-
formers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated Composite error

rated primary primary current at rated
current (%) accuracy limit
minutes centiradians primary current
(%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 – – 10
The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also
if there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,
power metering, and so on) of the protection relay.
354 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U Requirements for measurement
transformers
The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitude
at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary
current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance
of the protection relay.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limit
factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CT
burden.
The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:
Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden S n

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT
S the actual external burden
4.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection
Current transformer selection

Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the
accuracy class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,
recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal
and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is not
exceeded. This is always fulfilled when
I1n > Ikmax / 100,
Ikmax is the highest fault current.
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of
the protection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal
primary current can be used than given by the formula.
Recommended start current settings

If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to
operate, the start current should be set using the formula:
Current start value < 0.7 × (Ikmin / I1n)
I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.
The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current
transformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the
high set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused
by the CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is
noticeably lower than Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT
does not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply
according to the formula.
REF615 355
Application Manual
Requirements for measurement 1MRS756378 U
transformers
Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers

The saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure
the time selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate
times of successive protection relays.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that
is as long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current, when
the current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the
accuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on
the operate time setting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as
being as long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used,
the AC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20
times the starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further
prolonged. Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the
formula:
Fa > 20 × Current start value / I1n
The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay.
4.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.
Figure 607: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection
The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase
short circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is
calculated to be 59.
The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with
the next protection relay (not visible in Figure 607). The settings for the high-set
stage and instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the
downstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so
356 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U Requirements for measurement
transformers
that the protection relay operates with the minimum fault current and it does not
operate with the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in
Figure 607.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage
(I>>>) in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 × I2n). I2n is the 1.2 multiple with nominal
primary current of the CT. For the CT characteristics point of view, the criteria given
by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay
setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden could
have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.
REF615 357
Application Manual
Protection relay's physical connections 1MRS756378 U
5 Protection relay's physical connections
5.1 Inputs
5.1.1 Energizing inputs
5.1.1.1 Phase currents

The protection relay can also be used in single or two-phase applications
by leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied. However, at least
terminals X120:7-8 must be connected.
Table 72: Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C, D, E, F, H, J, K and

N
Terminal Description
X120:7-8 IL1
X120:9-10 IL2
X120:11-12 IL3
5.1.1.2 Residual current

Table 73: Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C, D, E, F, H, J and
N
X120:13-14 Io
Table 74: Residual current input included in configuration K
X120:5-6 IoB4
X120:13-14 Io
Table 75: Residual current input included in configuration G
X130:1-2 Io
4 Used only for HREFPDIF1
358 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U Protection relay's physical connections
5.1.1.3 Phase voltages

Table 76: Phase voltage inputs included in configurations E, F, H, J, K and N
X130:11-12 U1
X130:13-14 U2
X130:15-16 U3
Table 77: Reference voltage input for SECRSYN1 included in configurations H, J, K

and N
X130:9-10 U12B
5.1.1.4 Residual voltage

Table 78: Additional residual voltage input included in configurations A and B
X120:5-6 Uo
Table 79: Additional residual voltage input included in configurations E, F, H, J, K

and N
X130:17-18 Uo
5.1.1.5 Sensor inputs

Table 80: Combi sensor inputs included in configurations G and L
X131 IL1
U1
X132 IL2
U2
X133 IL3
U3
5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the protection relay is connected to terminals X100:1-2. At
DC supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100:1. The permitted auxiliary
voltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the protection
relay.
REF615 359
Application Manual
Table 81: Auxiliary voltage supply
X100:1 + Input
X100:2 - Input
5.1.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to
unlatch output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control
of protection relay's settings.
Binary inputs of slot X110 are available with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L and
N.
Table 82: Binary input terminals X110:1-13 with BIO0005 module
X110:1 BI1, +
X110:2 BI1, -
X110:3 BI2, +
X110:4 BI2, -
X110:5 BI3, +
X110:6 BI3, -
X110:6 BI4, -
X110:7 BI4, +
X110:8 BI5, +
X110:9 BI5, -
X110:9 BI6, -
X110:10 BI6, +
X110:11 BI7, +
X110:12 BI7, -
X110:12 BI8, -
X110:13 BI8, +
Table 83: Binary input terminals X110:1-10 with BIO0007 module
X110:1 BI1, +
X110:5 BI1, -
X110:2 BI2, +
X110:5 BI2, -
X110:3 BI3, +
X110:5 BI3, -
X110:4 BI4, +
X110:5 BI4, -
360 REF615
Application Manual
X110:6 BI5, +
X110:10 BI5, -
X110:7 BI6, +
X110:10 BI6, -
X110:8 BI7, +
X110:10 BI7, -
X110:9 BI8, +
X110:10 BI8, -
Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations C, D, E, F, H, J and N.
Table 84: Binary input terminals X120-1...6
X120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -
X120:5 BI4, +
X120:6 BI4, -
Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A and B.
Table 85: Binary input terminals X120:1-4
X120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -
Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations B and D.
Table 86: Binary input terminals X130:1-9
X130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:2 BI2, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI3, +
X130:5 BI3, -
REF615 361
Application Manual
X130:5 BI4, -
X130:6 BI4, +
X130:7 BI5, +
X130:8 BI5, -
X130:8 BI6, -
X130:9 BI6, +
Binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration K and optionally available
with configurations E, F, H, J and N.
Table 87: Binary input terminals X130:1-8 with AIM0006 module
X130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI2, -
X130:5 BI3, +
X130:6 BI3, -
X130:7 BI4, +
X130:8 BI4, -
5.1.4 Optional light sensor inputs

If the protection relay is provided with the optional communication module with
light sensor inputs, the pre-manufactured lens-sensor fibers are connected to
inputs X13, X14 and X15. See the connection diagrams. For further information, see
arc protection.
The protection relay is provided with connection sockets X13, X14
and X15 only if the optional communication module with light sensor
inputs has been installed. If the arc protection option is selected when
ordering a protection relay, the light sensor inputs are included in the
communication module.
Table 88: Light sensor input connectors
X13 Input Light sensor 1
5.1.5 RTD/mA inputs

It is possible to connect mA and RTD based measurement sensors to the protection
relay, if the protection relay is provided with the optional RTD0001 module in
standard configurations A and B and with the AIM0003 module in standard
configurations E, F, H, J and N.
362 REF615
Application Manual
Table 89: Optional RTD/mA inputs with RTD0001 module
X130:1 mA1 (AI1), +
X130:2 mA1 (AI1), -
X130:3 mA2 (AI2), +
X130:4 mA2 (AI2), -
X130:5 RTD1 (AI3), +
X130:6 RTD1 (AI3), -
X130:7 RTD2 (AI4), +
X130:8 RTD2 (AI4), -
X130:9 RTD3 (AI5), +
X130:10 RTD3 (AI5), -
X130:11 Common5
X130:12 Common6
X130:13 RTD4 (AI6), +
X130:14 RTD4 (AI6), -
X130:15 RTD5 (AI7), +
X130:16 RTD5 (AI7), -
X130:17 RTD6 (AI8), +
X130:18 RTD6 (AI8), -
Table 90: Optional RTD/mA inputs with AIM0003 module
X130:1 mA1 (AI1), +
X130:2 mA1 (AI1), -
X130:3 RTD1 (AI2), +
X130:4 RTD1 (AI2), -
X130:5 RTD1 (AI2), ground
X130:6 RTD2 (AI3), +
X130:7 RTD2 (AI3), -
X130:8 RTD2 (AI3), ground
5.2 Outputs
5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling

Output contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable
of controlling most circuit breakers. In the factory default configuration, the trip
signals from all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.
5 Common ground for RTD channels 1-3

6 Common ground for RTD channels 4-6
REF615 363
Application Manual
Table 91: Output contacts
X100:6 PO1, NO
X100:7 PO1, NO
X100:8 PO2, NO
X100:9 PO2, NO
X100:15 PO3, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:16 PO3, NO
X100:17 PO3, NO
X100:18 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO
X100:20 PO4, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:21 PO4, NO
X100:22 PO4, NO
5.2.2 Outputs for signalling

SO output contacts can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the
protection relay. On delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all
the protection stages are routed to signalling outputs.
Table 92: Output contacts X100:10-14
X100:10 SO1, common
X100:11 SO1, NC
X100:12 SO1, NO
X100:13 SO2, NO
X100:14 SO2, NO
Output contacts of slot X110 are available with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L

and N.
Table 93: Output contacts X110:14-24 with BIO0005
X110:14 SO1, common
X110:15 SO1, NO
X110:16 SO1, NC
X110:17 SO2, common
X110:18 SO2, NO
X110:19 SO2, NC
X110:20 SO3, common
364 REF615
Application Manual
X110:21 SO3, NO
X110:22 SO3, NC
X110:23 SO4, common
X110:24 SO4, NO
Table 94: Optional high-speed output contacts X110:15-24 with BIO0007
X110:15 HSO1, NO
X110:16 HSO1, NO
X110:19 HSO2, NO
X110:20 HSO2, NO
X110:23 HSO3, NO
X110:24 HSO3, NO
Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO module (BIO0006).
Output contacts of slot X130 are optional for configurations B and D.
Table 95: Output contacts X130:10-18
X130:10 SO1, common
X130:11 SO1, NO
X130:12 SO1, NC
X130:13 SO2, common
X130:14 SO2, NO
X130:15 SO2, NC
X130:16 SO3, common
X130:17 SO3, NO
X130:18 SO3, NC
5.2.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of
the protection relay. Under normal operating conditions, the protection relay is
energized and the contact is closed (X100:3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-
supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the contact X100:3-5
drops off and the contact X100:3-4 closes.
Table 96: IRF contact
X100:3 IRF, common
X100:4 Closed; IRF, or U aux disconnected
X100:5 Closed; no IRF, and U aux connected
REF615 365
Application Manual
Glossary 1MRS756378 U
6 Glossary
100BASE-FX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local
area networks (LANs) that uses fiber optic cabling
100BASE-TX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local
area networks (LANs) that uses twisted-pair cabling category 5 or higher
with RJ-45 connectors
615 series Series of numerical protection and control relays for protection and su-
pervision applications of utility substations, and industrial switchgear
and equipment
AC Alternating current
AI Analog input
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
BI Binary input
BIO Binary input and output
BO Binary output
CB Circuit breaker
CT Current transformer
DAN Doubly attached node
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by Westronic. The

DNP3 Users Group has the ownership of the protocol and assumes re-
sponsibility for its evolution.
DPC Double-point control
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based computer networking
technologies into a LAN
FIFO First in, first out

FTP File transfer protocol
FTPS FTP Secure
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
HMI Human-machine interface
HSO High-speed output
HSR High-availability seamless redundancy
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
HW Hardware
I/O Input/output
366 REF615
Application Manual
1MRS756378 U Glossary
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 1. Communication standard for protective equipment
60870-5-103
2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communica-
tion
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication and model-

ing
IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 Lite Edition of IEC 61850-9-2 offering process bus interface
LE
IED Intelligent electronic device
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices' (IEDs') Cy-
ber Security Capabilities
IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by periods.
Each server connected to the Internet is assigned a unique IP ad-
dress that specifies the location for the TCP/IP protocol.
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format B
LAN Local area network
LC Connector type for glass fiber cable, IEC 61754-20
LCD Liquid crystal display
LE Light Edition
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
MAC Media access control
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MMS 1. Manufacturing message specification
2. Metering management system
Modbus A serial communication protocol developed by the Modicon com-

pany in 1979. Originally used for communication in PLCs and RTU
devices.
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and Ethernet to carry
data between devices
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
PCM600 Protection and Control IED Manager
PO Power output
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PTP Precision Time Protocol
RCA Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic angle.
REF615 Feeder protection and control relay
RIO600 Remote I/O unit
RJ-45 Galvanic connector type
REF615 367
Application Manual
Glossary 1MRS756378 U
RS-232 Serial interface standard

RS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol
RTD Resistance temperature detector

RTU Remote terminal unit
SAN Single attached node
Single-line dia- Simplified notation for representing a three-phase power system.
gram Instead of representing each of three phases with a separate line
or terminal, only one conductor is represented.
SLD Single-line diagram
SMV Sampled measured values
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SO Signal output
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface
368 REF615
Application Manual
—
ABB Distribution Solutions
Digital Substation Products
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 VAASA, Finland
Phone +358 10 22 11
www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/relion
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1MRS756378 U
© Copyright 2022 ABB. All rights reserved.

REF615 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REF615 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

REF615 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

—

RELION® 615 SERIES

Feeder Protection and Control REF615

© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved

This product complies with following directive and regulations.

Directives of the European parliament and of the council:

3 REF615 standard configurations...........................................................38

3.3 Standard configuration A.................................................................................................................... 51

3.14 Standard configuration N.................................................................................................................. 331

4 Requirements for measurement transformers................................. 354

5 Protection relay's physical connections.............................................358

1.1 This manual

1.2 Intended audience

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from

1.3.2 Document revision history

1.3.3 Related documentation

Name of the document Document ID

1.4 Symbols and conventions

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

1.4.2 Document conventions

To navigate between the options, use and .

To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

2.1.1 Product version history

Table continues on the next page

Product version Product history

3.0 • New configurations G and H

4.0 • New configuration J

4.0 FP1 • High-availability seamless redundancy ( HSR) protocol

Table continues on the next page

Product version Product history

5.0 FP1 • IEC 61850 Edition 2

2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version

2.2 Operation functionality

2.2.1 Optional functions

2.3 Physical hardware

Table 2: Plug-in unit and case

Main unit Slot ID Content options

Plug-in unit - HMI Small (5 lines, 20 characters)

Small Chinese (3 lines, 8 or more characters)

Table continues on the next page

Main unit Slot ID Content options

Only with configurations B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L and N:

Only with configurations C, D, E, F, H, J and N:

Only with configuration K:

Case X130 AI/ BI module Only with configurations E, F, H, J, K and N:

Additionally with configurations H, J, K and N:

AI/ RTD/mA module Only with configurations E, F, H, J and N:

Additionally with configurations H, J and N:

Sensor input module Only with configurations G and L:

Table continues on the next page

Main unit Slot ID Content options

Optional BIO module Optional for configurations B and D: